Ford - C Max Energi - Owners Manual - 2016 - 2016 (3)

2016 C-MAX HYBRID | C-MAX ENERGI Owner’s Manual ford.ca August 2015 First Printing Owner’s Manual C-MAX Hybrid/Energi Litho in U.S.A. GM5J 19A321 FA 2016 C-MAX HYBRID | C-MAX ENERGI Owner’s Manual owner.ford.com The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2015 All rights reserved. Part Number: 20150713164400 Table of Contents Driver and Passenger Airbags...................36 Front Passenger Sensing System.............37 Side Airbags.....................................................39 Driver Knee Airbag.........................................40 Safety Canopy™............................................40 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........42 Airbag Disposal...............................................43 Introduction About This Manual...........................................7 Symbols Glossary.............................................7 Data Recording..................................................9 California Proposition 65..............................11 Perchlorate.........................................................11 Ford Credit..........................................................11 Replacement Parts Recommendation........................................11 Special Notices................................................12 Mobile Communications Equipment.....................................................12 Export Unique Options..................................13 Keys and Remote Controls General Information on Radio Frequencies..................................................44 Remote Control..............................................44 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control...........................................................50 Environment MyKey™ Protecting the Environment........................14 Principle of Operation...................................51 Creating a MyKey............................................52 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................52 Checking MyKey System Status...............54 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems.........................................................54 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................54 Child Safety General Information.......................................15 Installing Child Restraints............................16 Booster Seats..................................................22 Child Restraint Positioning.........................24 Child Safety Locks..........................................25 Locks Seatbelts Locking and Unlocking.................................56 Manual Liftgate..............................................60 Power Liftgate..................................................61 Principle of Operation...................................27 Fastening the Seatbelts..............................28 Seatbelt Height Adjustment.....................30 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime..............................................................31 Seatbelt Reminder..........................................31 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance................................................33 Security Passive Anti-Theft System........................65 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................66 Steering Wheel Personal Safety System™ Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................67 Audio Control...................................................67 Voice Control...................................................68 Cruise Control.................................................68 Information Display Control......................69 Personal Safety System™..........................34 Supplementary Restraints System Principle of Operation..................................35 1 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Table of Contents Heated Windows and Mirrors....................111 Cabin Air Filter..................................................111 Remote Start....................................................111 Wipers and Washers Windshield Wipers.........................................70 Autowipers........................................................70 Windshield Washers......................................72 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........72 Seats Sitting in the Correct Position...................113 Head Restraints..............................................113 Manual Seats..................................................115 Power Seats.....................................................117 Rear Seats........................................................119 Heated Seats.................................................120 Rear Seat Armrest........................................120 Lighting General Information......................................74 Lighting Control...............................................74 Autolamps.........................................................75 Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................76 Headlamp Exit Delay....................................76 Daytime Running Lamps..............................77 Front Fog Lamps.............................................77 Direction Indicators........................................78 Interior Lamps.................................................78 Ambient Lighting............................................79 Universal Garage Door Opener Universal Garage Door Opener.................121 Auxiliary Power Points Auxiliary Power Points................................126 Windows and Mirrors Power Windows.............................................80 Global Opening................................................81 Exterior Mirrors.................................................81 Interior Mirror...................................................83 Sun Visors.........................................................83 Sun Shades......................................................84 Storage Compartments Center Console..............................................128 Overhead Console........................................128 Starting and Stopping the Engine General Information....................................129 Ignition Switch...............................................129 Keyless Starting............................................129 Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................130 Engine Block Heater.....................................132 Automatic Engine Shutdown...................133 Instrument Cluster Gauges...............................................................85 Warning Lamps and Indicators................89 Audible Warnings and Indicators.............92 Information Displays General Information......................................93 Information Messages.................................101 Unique Driving Characteristics Climate Control Hybrid Vehicle Operation...........................135 Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation...........137 Hybrid Vehicle Frequently Asked Questions....................................................140 EcoSelect.........................................................142 Automatic Climate Control......................108 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate........................................................109 2 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Table of Contents Fuel and Refueling Cruise Control Safety Precautions.......................................143 Fuel Quality....................................................144 Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................145 Running Out of Fuel....................................145 Refueling.........................................................146 Fuel Consumption.......................................150 Emission Control System..........................150 Principle of Operation.................................179 Using Cruise Control....................................179 Driving Aids High Voltage Battery Rear Under Floor Storage..........................182 Luggage Covers.............................................182 Load Limit.......................................................183 Steering.............................................................181 Load Carrying General Information....................................153 Charging the High Voltage Battery........155 High Voltage Battery Cut-Off Switch..........................................................160 Towing Towing a Trailer.............................................190 Transporting the Vehicle...........................190 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......190 Transmission Automatic Transmission.............................161 Driving Hints Brakes Breaking-In......................................................192 Economical Driving......................................192 Driving Through Water................................193 Floor Mats.......................................................194 General Information....................................164 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes...........................................................165 Parking Brake.................................................165 Hill Start Assist..............................................165 Roadside Emergencies Roadside Assistance...................................195 Hazard Warning Flashers..........................196 Fuel Shutoff...................................................196 Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................197 Collision, Damage or Fire Event..............199 Post-Crash Alert System...........................201 Traction Control Principle of Operation.................................167 Using Traction Control................................167 Stability Control Principle of Operation................................168 Using Stability Control...............................169 Customer Assistance Getting the Services You Need...............202 In California (U.S. Only)............................203 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only).....................204 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only).......................205 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada........................................................205 Parking Aids Principle of Operation.................................170 Rear Parking Aid............................................170 Front Parking Aid............................................171 Active Park Assist..........................................172 Rear View Camera........................................176 3 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Table of Contents Ordering Additional Owner's Literature....................................................206 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).............................................................207 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only).............................................................207 Fuse Specification Chart..........................209 Changing a Fuse............................................217 Cleaning the Engine....................................243 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades..........................................................243 Cleaning the Interior...................................244 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens.......................244 Cleaning Leather Seats.............................245 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............245 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................245 Vehicle Storage............................................246 Maintenance Wheels and Tires General Information....................................218 Opening and Closing the Hood...............218 Under Hood Overview - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)............................................219 Under Hood Overview - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)..........................221 Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................222 Engine Oil Check..........................................222 Engine Coolant Check................................223 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check............................................................227 Brake Fluid Check.........................................227 Power Steering Fluid Check.....................227 Washer Fluid Check.....................................227 Fuel Filter.........................................................227 Changing the 12V Battery.........................228 Checking the Wiper Blades......................229 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................229 Adjusting the Headlamps..........................231 Removing a Headlamp..............................232 Changing a Bulb...........................................232 Bulb Specification Chart...........................237 Changing the Engine Air Filter................238 Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................249 Tire Care..........................................................255 Using Snow Chains.....................................270 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........270 Technical Specifications...........................274 Fuses Capacities and Specifications Engine Specifications.................................276 Motorcraft Parts............................................277 Vehicle Identification Number................278 Vehicle Certification Label.......................279 Transmission Code Designation............279 Capacities and Specifications...............280 Audio System General Information...................................283 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC............................................................284 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/ FM/CD.........................................................286 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/ CD.................................................................288 Digital Radio...................................................291 Satellite Radio..............................................294 USB Port.........................................................296 Media Hub......................................................296 Vehicle Care General Information....................................241 Cleaning Products........................................241 Cleaning the Exterior...................................241 Waxing.............................................................242 4 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Table of Contents SYNC™ General Information...................................297 Using Voice Recognition...........................299 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............302 SYNC™ Applications and Services.......315 SYNC™ AppLink™......................................323 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player...........................................................325 SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................335 Accessories Accessories....................................................344 Extended Service Plan (ESP) Extended Service Plan (ESP).................346 Scheduled Maintenance General Maintenance Information.......348 Normal Scheduled Maintenance...........352 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance.............................................354 Scheduled Maintenance Record...........356 Appendices End User License Agreement.................366 5 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing 6 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about your vehicle, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E154903 A Right-hand side. B Left-hand side. SYMBOLS GLOSSARY These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Safety alert Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to the vehicle you have purchased. See Owner's Manual Air conditioning system Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used in different models, so they may appear different to you on your vehicle. E162384 Anti-lock braking system Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations. Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle. Battery Battery acid This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat. Brake fluid - non petroleum based 7 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction Brake system Front airbag Cabin air filter Front fog lamps Check fuel cap Fuel pump reset Child safety door lock or unlock Fuse compartment Child seat lower anchor Hazard warning flashers Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window Cruise control Heated windshield Do not open when hot Interior luggage compartment release Engine air filter Jack Engine coolant Keep out of reach of children E71340 E161353 Engine coolant temperature Lighting control Engine oil Low tire pressure warning Explosive gas Maintain correct fluid level Fan warning Note operating instructions Fasten seatbelt Panic alarm 8 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, when your vehicle is in for service or repair, Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 297). Parking aid E139213 Parking brake Power steering fluid Power windows front/rear Power window lockout Service engine soon Event Data Recording Side airbag This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. Shield the eyes E167012 Stability control E138639 Windshield wash and wipe The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the brake pedal; and • How fast the vehicle was traveling; and • Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel. DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair 9 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the 911 Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 297). Note: Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an event data recorder, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel information”), only to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate the service. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and Information, Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™ (page 297). 10 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well as to help manage your account. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGS Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Phone: 1-800-727-7000 For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as to access Account Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com. REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging. PERCHLORATE Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, safety belt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications. For more information visit: Web Address www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate Collision Repairs FORD CREDIT We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle (U.S. Only) Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for your business. 11 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II) development we validate these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts. Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II) system has a data port for diagnostics, repair and reprogramming services with diagnostic scan tools. Installing a non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty may not cover damage caused by any non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in device. Warranty on Replacement Parts Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty Manual that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Manual. Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios. Special Instructions For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. WARNINGS You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the warning symbol. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag. 12 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required information and warnings. 13 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Environment PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim. 14 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS is compatible with and properly installed in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, locate your local St. John Ambulance office by searching for St. John Ambulance on the internet, or Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. WARNINGS Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. All children are shaped differently. The recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child height, age and weight thresholds from National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and other safety organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child, and Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. 15 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended restraint type Infants or toddlers Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat). Small children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Use a belt-positioning booster seat. Larger children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer). • • • You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the United States and Canada. Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle. When possible, always properly restrain children 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. See Front Passenger Sensing System (page 37). INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS Child Seats E142594 16 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest, and seat back upright. Child Safety • Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or children weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less (generally age four or younger). • Using Lap and Shoulder Belts Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in the upright position. Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip. Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap and shoulder belts: WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back. Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat, the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. 1. When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts: • Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position. • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. E142529 E142528 17 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. Child Safety 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. E142875 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. E142530 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E142531 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. E142533 18 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). WARNINGS Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors located where seat back and seat cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind that seating position. LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat, however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat. E142534 10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement for proper installation. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral to a Certified Passenger Seat Technician. 19 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating Use) WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 inches (28 centimeters) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle. E142535 Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol. The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches (46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position. LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer's instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor. Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to your vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation. E144054 The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the symbols as shown. Follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments. Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown. 20 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors: Note: If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching your vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Using Tether Straps 1. Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat. For outboard seating positions, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. For the center seating positions, route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint. If needed, the head restraints can also be removed. Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top tether strap. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): E161562 2. Locate the correct anchor on the back panel of the rear seat for the selected seating position. The anchors are labeled with the tether strap symbol and are partially covered by the gap panel. Pull the panel back to fully expose the anchors. E142537 21 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat: E161563 3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. 4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions. If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends its use. E142595 • BOOSTER SEATS WARNING • • Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder belt under a child's arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. • • Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt. 22 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion? Can the child sit without slouching? Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Child Safety Types of Booster Seats E70710 • E68924 • Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child's head (as measured at the tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back booster seat. Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child's hips. E142596 23 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing High back booster seats If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child's head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice. Child Safety E142597 WARNINGS provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child's height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death. If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer's instructions. CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death. WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat. Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a crash. Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder belt under a child's arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child's size, height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions and warnings 24 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety WARNINGS To avoid risk of injury, do not leave WARNINGS children or pets unattended in your vehicle. Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X Restraint Type Combined weight of child and child seat LATCH (lower anchors and top tether anchor) LATCH (lower anchors only) Rear facing Up to 65 lb child seat (29.5 kg) Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt and LATCH only and top (lower tether anchors anchor and top tether anchor) X X Rear facing Over 65 lb child seat (29.5 kg) Forward facing child seat Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) Forward facing child seat Over 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Seats (page 113). CHILD SAFETY LOCKS When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside. 25 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing X X X X Child Safety E112197 The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door. Left-Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock. Right-Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock. 26 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. WARNINGS Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash. All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. The safety belt system consists of: • lap and shoulder safety belts • shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver safety belt) • height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions • retractor and anchor pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions • belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. When possible, all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. 27 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing • safety belt warning light and chime • crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. Seatbelts The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt pretensioners on the retractor and anchor at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant's body when activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal crashes, the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags. E142588 2. To unfasten, press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. FASTENING THE SEATBELTS The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. E142589 When in use, the rear safety belts should be placed in the belt guides on the outboard seatbacks. E142587 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the following figure. 28 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode, and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows: Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. E142590 Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt. The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow. The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest. In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner. Safety Belt Locking Modes WARNINGS After any vehicle crash, the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be checked for proper function. Automatic Locking Mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes. This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible. See Child Safety (page 15). 29 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is on a label located either at the end of the webbing or on the retractor behind the trim. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING E142591 Position the seatbelt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctly could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury in a crash. 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. Safety Belt Extension Assembly WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. E87511 To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze the button and slide the height adjuster up or down. Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, a safety belt extension assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer. 30 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the driver's safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned on. SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR CHIME Conditions of operation If... Then... The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position... The safety belt warning light illuminates 12 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds. The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding... The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off. The driver's safety belt is buckled before The safety belt warning light and indicator the ignition switch is turned to the on posichime remain off. tion... The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the Belt-Minder feature for objects you place in the front passenger seat, only the front seat passengers receive warnings as determined by the front passenger sensing system. SEATBELT REMINDER Belt-Minder™ This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing additional reminders that intermittently sound a tone and illuminate the safety belt warning light when you are in the driver seat or you have a front seat passenger and a safety belt is unbuckled. If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings for about five minutes) for one passenger (driver or front passenger), the other passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder feature to turn on. 31 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts If... Then... You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before you switch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... The Belt-Minder feature will not activate. The Belt-Minder feature activates, the You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before your vehicle safety belt warning light illuminates and a reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every minutes elapse after you switch the ignition 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger on... buckle your safety belts. The Belt-Minder feature activates, the The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute safety belt warning light illuminates and a while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger elapse after you switch the ignition on... buckle your safety belts. Before following the procedure, make sure that: • The parking brake is set. • The transmission is in park (P). • The ignition is off. • The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled. Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder Feature WARNING While the system allows you to deactivate it, this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle. 1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the vehicle. 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (about one minute). After Step 2, wait an additional five seconds before proceeding with Step 3. Once you start Step 3, you must complete the procedure within 60 seconds. 3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the safety belt warning light turns on. Note: The driver and front passenger warnings switch on and off independently. When you perform this procedure for one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process. Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure. 32 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts 4. While the safety belt warning light is on, buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt warning light flashes for confirmation. • This will switch the feature off for that seating position if it is currently on. • This will switch the feature on for that seating position if it is currently off. CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT MAINTENANCE Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle Care (page 241). 33 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Personal Safety System™ How Does the Personal Safety System Work? The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations. The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of the safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the restraints control module may deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one or both stages of the dual-stage airbags based on crash severity and occupant conditions. The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists of: • Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints. • Front seat outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors and safety belt usage sensors. • Driver seat position sensor. • Front passenger sensing system. • Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp. • Front crash severity sensors. • Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors. • Restraint system warning light and backup tone. • The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensors, safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position sensor, front passenger sensing system and indicator lights. 34 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal. All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation as this may result in serious injury. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required. If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. 35 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS WARNING WARNINGS Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module. To properly position yourself away from the airbag: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. E151127 The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes. Children and Airbags WARNING The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of: • Driver and passenger airbag modules. • Front passenger sensing system. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. · Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 42). 36 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly–seated occupant and determine if the front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. E142846 Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash. E183107 The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. The indicator lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel. FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM WARNINGS Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. Note: When the ignition is first turned on, the passenger airbag off light will illuminate for a short period of time to confirm it is functional. The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology, parents are strongly encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty. Sitting improperly out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor. Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system which could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. 37 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System • • When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. If the child restraint has been installed and the passenger airbag status indicator does not illuminate, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger seat, but the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens: • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position. • Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended. • Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag. • If the passenger airbag status indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat. The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat. • When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger airbag status indicator will not illuminate. Occupant Passenger airbag status indicator Passenger airbag Empty Unlit Disabled Child Lit Disabled Adult Unlit Enabled Note: When the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is illuminated, the passenger side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries. feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion, with their 38 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check for the following: • Objects lodged underneath the seat. • Objects between the seat cushion and the center console. • Objects hanging off the seatback. • Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket. • Objects placed on the occupant's lap. • Cargo interference with the seat • Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat. • Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat. • • • • Do not attempt to repair or service the system. Take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer. If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger sensing system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above. SIDE AIRBAGS WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Make sure the front passenger sensing system is operating properly. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 42). If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident. The driver or adult passengers should check for objects that lodged underneath the front passenger seat, or cargo interfering with the seat. Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback. If there are lodged objects, or cargo is interfering with the seat, take the following steps to remove the obstruction: • Pull the vehicle over. • Turn the vehicle off. • Driver or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 39 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Remove the obstruction(s) (if found). Restart the vehicle. Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is no longer illuminated. If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system. Supplementary Restraints System Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat. WARNINGS If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags. The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes. DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG A driver's knee airbag is located under the instrument panel. During a crash, the restraints control module may activate the driver's knee airbag based on crash severity and occupant conditions. Under certain crash and occupant conditions, the driver’s knee airbag may deploy but the driver’s front airbag may not activate. As with front and side airbags, it is important to be properly seated and restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury. Make sure the knee airbag is operating properly. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 42). E152533 The system consists of the following: • A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle. • Side airbags located inside the driver and front passenger seatbacks. • Front passenger sensing system. • SAFETY CANOPY™ WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 42). 40 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System WARNINGS Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the curtain airbags, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. E75004 The system consists of the following: • Safety canopy curtain airbags located above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar trim. • A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag. If the curtain airbags have deployed, the curtain airbags will not function again. The curtain airbags (including the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. · Crash sensors and monitoring system with a readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 42). Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening. The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events. The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety Canopy). 41 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR • WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of your vehicle. • • If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash. Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide information to the restraints control module which deploys (activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side airbags, and the Safety Canopy. Based on the type of accident (frontal impact, side impact or rollover) the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices. The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to activate when your vehicle sustains frontal or sideways deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. A warning indicator light in the instrument cluster indicates the readiness of the safety system. If this warning indicator light is not functioning and there is another fault within the system, the message cluster may display an airbag failure warning. See Information Displays (page 93). You will hear five tones that repeat periodically until you repair the problem, the warning indicator light or both. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required. The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (for example, crash severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices. • The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration. • The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal, near-frontal, side and rollover crashes. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: 42 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on. The readiness light will either flash or stay lit. A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem, the light or both are repaired. Supplementary Restraints System • • • The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side crashes. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation. The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on crash severity and occupant conditions. The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes and when a certain likelihood of rollover is detected by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover. AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel. 43 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Intelligent Access (If Equipped) The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions are met: • You activate the front exterior door handle switch. • You press the luggage compartment button. • You press a button on the transmitter. Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the transmitter battery is low, you may need to mechanically unlock your door. You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation. See Remote Control (page 44). The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range. One of the following could cause a decrease in operating range: • Weather conditions. • Nearby radio towers. • Structures around the vehicle. • Other vehicles parked next to your vehicle. REMOTE CONTROL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (If Equipped) The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other radio transmitters, for example amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, wireless remote controls, cell phones, battery chargers and alarm systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key. E142585 Use the key blade to start your vehicle and unlock or lock the driver door from outside your vehicle. The transmitter portion functions as the remote control. Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before leaving it unattended. 44 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls Your intelligent access keys operate the power locks and the remote start system. The key must be in your vehicle to activate the push-button start system. Mechanical Key Blade The intelligent access key also contains a removable mechanical key blade that you can use to unlock the driver door. Type 1 E138615 2 Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with a security label that provides important vehicle key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference. Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped) Type 1 1 E87964 1 To release the mechanical key blade: 1. Press and hold the push buttons on the edges of the transmitter to release the cover. Carefully remove the cover. 2. Remove the key blade. E162192 Type 2 E138616 45 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls Type 2 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter E138619 E142431 Slide the release on the back of the transmitter to release the key blade, then pull the blade out. 1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the transmitter near the key ring to remove the battery cover. 2. Remove the old battery. E138618 E138620 Note: Your vehicle’s back-up keys came with a security tag that provides important vehicle key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe place for future reference. 3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing. 4. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter. Replacing the Battery Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries. Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board. Note: Replacing the battery does not delete the transmitter from the vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally. The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent. 46 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls Intelligent Access Key (Type 1) 2 1 4 E119190 4. Twist the screwdriver in the position shown to separate the two halves of the remote control. 1 E87964 5 1. Press and hold the buttons on the edges to release the cover. Carefully remove the cover. 2. Remove the key blade. 3 E125860 Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver. 5. Carefully remove the battery with the screwdriver. 6. Install a new battery with the + facing downward. 7. Assemble the two halves of the remote control. 8. Install the key blade. E105362 3. Twist the screwdriver in the position shown to start separating the two halves of the remote control. 47 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls Intelligent Access Key (Type 2) Car Finder 1. Press the lock button on the key twice within three seconds. The horn sounds and the turn signals flash. We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm. Remove the backup key from the transmitter. Note: If locking was not successful or if any door or the liftgate is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or remote start, the horn does sound twice and the lamp does not flash. Sounding a Panic Alarm (If Equipped) Note: The panic alarm only operates when the ignition is off. E142432 2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden behind the backup key head to remove the battery cover. Do not use the backup key to remove the cover or you could damage the intelligent access key. Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again or E138624 switch the ignition on to deactivate it. Remote Start (If Equipped) WARNING To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated. Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel. The remote start button is on the transmitter. E138622 E138625 This feature allows you to start your vehicle from outside the vehicle. The transmitter has an extended operating range. 3. Remove the old battery. 4. Insert a new battery with the + facing downward. Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing. 5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the backup key. Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate when the vehicle is remote started. See Automatic Climate Control (page 108). 48 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls The horn sounds if the system fails to start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise. You can switch it on or off in the information display. See General Information (page 93). Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems. The remote start system does not work if any of the following occur: • The ignition is on. • The alarm system triggers. • You disable the feature. • The hood is open. • The transmission is not in P. • The vehicle battery voltage is too low. • The powertrain fault indicator was on the last time your vehicle was driven. Note: If you remote start your vehicle with an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must switch the ignition on before driving your vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with an intelligent access transmitter, you must press the START/STOP button on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle. The power windows do not work during remote start and the radio does not turn on automatically. The parking lamps remain on and the vehicle runs for 5, 10, or 15 minutes, depending on the setting. Remote Starting the Vehicle Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other. If you do not follow this sequence, your vehicle does not remote start, the exterior lamps do not flash twice, and the horn does not sound. Extending the Vehicle Run Time Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still running to extend the run time for another remote start duration. If the duration is set to last 10 minutes, the duration extends by another 10 minutes. For example, if the vehicle had been running from the first remote start for five minutes, the vehicle continues to run now for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend the remote start up to a maximum of 30 minutes. Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle shutdown. E138626 The label on your transmitter details the starting procedure. Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting To remote start your vehicle: Press the button once. The parking lamps turns off. 1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors. 2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps flash twice. E138625 You may have to be closer to the vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle. 49 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls You can disable or enable the remote start system through the information display. See General Information (page 93). REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL Replacement keys or remote controls can be purchased from an authorized dealer. Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 65). 50 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing MyKey™ • PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes. • Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as administrator keys or admin keys. These can be used to: • • • • Create a MyKey. Program configurable MyKey settings. Clear all MyKey features. Configurable Settings With an admin key, you can configure certain MyKey settings when you first create a MyKey and before you recycle the key or restart the vehicle. You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key. When you have programmed a MyKey, you can access the following information using the information display: • • How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to your vehicle. The total distance your vehicle has traveled using a MyKey. • Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the same settings. You cannot program them individually. Note: For vehicles with push-button start, when both a MyKey and an admin remote transmitter are present, the admin remote transmitter will be recognized by the vehicle while switching the ignition on to start the vehicle. A vehicle speed limit can be set. Warnings will be shown in the display followed by an audible tone when your vehicle reaches the set speed. You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator pedal or by setting cruise control. WARNING Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit to a limit that will prevent the driver from maintaining a safe speed considering posted speed limits and prevailing road conditions. The driver is always responsible to drive in accordance with local laws and prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could result in accident or injury. Non-configurable Settings The following settings cannot be changed by an admin key user: 51 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seat belt reminder or Belt Minder. You cannot disable this feature. The audio system will mute when the front seat passengers' safety belts are not fastened. Early low fuel. The low-fuel warning activates earlier, giving the MyKey user more time to refuel. Driver assist features, if equipped on your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid. MyKey™ • • • MyKey is successfully created. Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys. Various vehicle speed minders can be set. Once you select a speed, it will be shown in the display, followed by an audible tone when the preselected vehicle speed is exceeded. Audio system maximum volume of 45%. A message will be shown in the display when you attempt to exceed the limited volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or compensated automatic volume control will be disabled. Always on setting. When this is selected, you will not be able to turn off Advance Trac or traction control (if your vehicle is equipped with this feature). You can also program configurable settings for the key(s). Refer to Programming/Changing Configurable Settings. Programming/Changing Configurable Settings Use the information display to access your configurable MyKey settings: 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key or fob. 2. Access the main menu on the information display controls, and select Settings, then MyKey by pressing OK or the > button. 3. Use the arrow buttons to get to a configurable feature. 4. Press OK or > to make a selection. Note: You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during the same key cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you have switched the engine off, however, you will need an admin key to change or clear your MyKey settings. CREATING A MYKEY Use the information display to create a MyKey: 1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with a push-button start, hold the intelligent access key next to the steering column. Details on the correct fob placement and position is in another chapter. See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 129). CLEARING ALL MYKEYS 2. Switch the ignition on. 3. Access the main menu on the information display controls, and select Settings and then MyKey by pressing OK or the > button. You can clear or change your MyKey settings using the information display control on the steering wheel. See Information Displays (page 93). 4. Press OK or the > button to select Create MyKey. Switch the ignition on using an admin key or remote control. 5. When prompted, hold the OK button until you see a message informing you to label this key as a MyKey. The key will be restricted at your vehicle's next start. 52 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing MyKey™ To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to: Message Action and Description Settings Press the OK button. MyKey Press the OK button. Clear MyKey Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays. All MyKeys Cleared Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status. 53 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing MyKey™ Number of MyKeys CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when all MyKeys have been deleted. You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). Number of Admin Keys MyKey Distance Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many admin keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed. Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a MyKey. USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS MyKey is not compatible with non Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, see an authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system. MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING Condition I cannot create a MyKey. Potential Causes • • The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key (there always has to be at least one admin key). 54 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing MyKey™ Condition Potential Causes • • I cannot program the configurable settings. • • I cannot clear the MyKeys. • • Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless start transmitter is not placed in the backup position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 130). SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode. The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges. No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 52). The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges. No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 52). I lost the only admin key. Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer. I lost a key. Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 65). MyKey distances do not accumulate. • • • No MyKey functions with the keyless entry transmitter. • • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey. An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys. The key system has been reset. An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start. No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 52). 55 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate a change to the unlocking mode. The unlocking mode applies to the remote control and intelligent access. LOCKING AND UNLOCKING You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock your vehicle. Power Door Locks The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels. Intelligent access at the driver door will unlock all doors when you disable two-stage unlocking. A Locking the Doors Type 1 B Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will illuminate. E162487 A Unlock B Lock Type 2 Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will illuminate. Door Lock Indicator E138623 An LED on the instrument panel will light when you lock the doors. It is not a functional control. Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will sound and the turn signals will flash if all the doors and the luggage compartment are closed. Remote Control Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock) Note: If locking was not successful or any door or the liftgate is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or remote start, the horn will sound twice and the lamps will not flash. Type 1 Press the button to unlock the driver door. Liftgate Type 2 Press the button to unlock the driver door. WARNINGS Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area before using the liftgate control. E138629 Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signals will flash. 56 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks WARNINGS Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate open, keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate. Press twice within three seconds to: E138630 • • unlatch a manual liftgate open, close or stop the movement of a power liftgate. See Power Liftgate (page 61). E112203 Left-Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock. Mechanical Key Right-Hand Side Turn the top of the key toward the front of your vehicle once to lock all doors. Turn counterclockwise to lock. Turn the top of the key toward the rear of your vehicle once to unlock the driver door only. Opening a Rear Door from Inside Pull the interior door release handle twice to unlock and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks the door and the second pull will unlatch the door. Locking the Doors Individually If the power locks fail to operate, lock the doors individually using the key in the position shown. Activating Intelligent Access (If Equipped) The intelligent access key must be within 3 feet (1 meter) of your vehicle. At the Front Doors Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock and open the door. The unlock sensor is on the back of the handle. Make sure not to touch the lock sensor area on the front of the handle. 57 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks Smart Unlocks For Integrated Keyhead Transmitter This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of your vehicle if your key is still in the ignition. When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle with the power door lock control, all the doors will lock then unlock if your key is still in the ignition. You can still lock your vehicle with the key in the ignition by pressing the lock button on the transmitter even if the doors are not closed. E185863 If both front doors are closed, you can lock your vehicle by any method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not. Press and hold the lock sensor area for about a second to lock your vehicle. To avoid unlocking the door inadvertently, make sure you only touch the lock sensor and not other areas of the door handle. Smart Unlocks For Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) After locking the doors with the lock sensor, there is a brief delay before you can unlock your vehicle. This delay lets you pull the handle to make sure it locked. This feature helps to prevent you from unintentionally locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment or rear cargo area. Note: Keep the door handle surface clean to avoid issues with operation. When you lock your vehicle using the power door lock control (with the door open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your vehicle will search for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment after you close the door. If your vehicle finds a key, all of the doors will immediately unlock. At the Liftgate In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle, you can lock your vehicle after all doors are closed by pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key or touching the locking area on the handle with another intelligent access key in your hand. E138632 When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the power door lock control, all doors will lock then unlock if the ignition is on. Press the exterior liftgate release button on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle. 58 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks Autolock (If Equipped) 4. Press the power door unlock button three times. 5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will sound indicating your vehicle is in programming mode. The autolock feature will lock all the doors when: • all doors are closed • the ignition is on, • you shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion, and • your vehicle attains a speed greater than 4 mph (7 km/h). Autolock: Press the power door unlock button then the lock button. The horn will sound once if disabled or twice (one short and one long) if enabled. Autounlock: Press the power door lock button then the unlock button. The horn will sound once if disabled or twice (one short and one long) if enabled. Autounlock (If Equipped) The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when: • the ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and your vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 4 mph (7 km/h); • your vehicle comes to a stop and you switch the ignition off or to accessory; and • you open the driver door within 10 minutes of the switching the ignition off or to accessory. After programming the feature, switch the ignition off. The horn will sound once indicating programming is complete. Note: You can enable or disable the autounlock feature independently of the autolock feature. Illuminated Entry The interior lamps and select exterior lamps will illuminate when you unlock the doors with the remote entry system. Note: The doors will not autounlock if you electronically lock your vehicle after you switch the ignition off and before you open the driver door. The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if: • you start your vehicle, • you press the remote control lock button, or • after 25 seconds of illumination. Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock Note: Your authorized dealer can perform this procedure, or you can do the procedure yourself. The lights will not turn off if: • you turn them on with the lamp control, or • any door is open. To enable or disable these features, do the following: Illuminated Exit Note: You will have 30 seconds to complete the procedure. The interior lamps and select exterior lamps will illuminate when all doors are closed and you switch the ignition off. 1. Switch the ignition on. 2. Press the power door unlock button three times. 3. Switch the ignition off. 59 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks Note: Do not hang anything, for example a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components. The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain closed and: • 25 seconds elapse, or • you lock your vehicle from the outside. Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. This could damage the liftgate and its components. Battery Saver If you leave the courtesy lamps or dome lamps on and switch the ignition off, the battery saver shuts them off after some time. Opening the Liftgate Manually Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) If you leave the ignition on after leaving your vehicle, it will shut off 15 minutes after you close all of the doors. MANUAL LIFTGATE WARNINGS It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. E138632 Press the button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate, and then pull on the outside handle. With the Remote Control E138630 Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate open, keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. liftgate. Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate. 60 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Press the button twice within three seconds to unlock the liftgate. Manually open the Locks Closing the Liftgate Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate before operating or moving your vehicle, especially in an enclosure, like a garage or a parking structure. This could damage the liftgate and its components. Note: Do not hang anything, for example a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components. The liftgate only operates with the transmission in park (P). If there is a problem with the open or close request, a tone will sound for one of the following reasons: E155976 A handle is located inside the liftgate to help with closing. • • POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped) • WARNINGS It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully opened, this indicates there may be excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible gas strut failure. A repetitive tone sounds and the liftgate closes under control. Remove any excessive weight from the liftgate. If the liftgate continues to close after opening, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate open, keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. Opening and Closing the Liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control. Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate. Keep keys out of reach of children. Do not allow children to operate or play near an open or moving power liftgate. You should supervise the operation of the power liftgate at all times. Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. This could damage the liftgate and its components. 61 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing The ignition is on and the transmission is not in park (P). The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage. The liftgate is not fully closed and your vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h). Locks Closing the Liftgate From the Instrument Panel Press the button on the instrument panel. WARNING Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch. E138633 With the Remote Control Press the button twice within three seconds. E138630 With the Outside Control Button Opening the Liftgate 1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote control or power door unlock control. If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks when you press the liftgate release button. E138636 Press and release the liftgate control button. Stopping the Liftgate Movement Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force to the liftgate while it is in motion. This could damage the power liftgate and its components. You can stop the liftgate movement by doing any of the following: • Pressing the liftgate control button. • Pressing the liftgate button on the remote control twice. • Pressing the liftgate button on the instrument panel. • Activating the obstacle detection feature. • Moving your foot under and away from the center rear bumper in a single-kick * motion. E138632 2. Press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle. Note: Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or reverse its direction. Manually interfering with the liftgate motion may also replicate a gas strut failure. * This method only works for vehicles with the hands-free liftgate feature. 62 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks Setting the Liftgate Open Height Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce and activate obstacle detection. To prevent this, let the power liftgate close completely before you enter your vehicle. Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate open while driving. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing the control button on the liftgate when it reaches the desired height. Note: Once the liftgate has stopped moving, you can also manually move it to the desired height. 3. Press and hold the liftgate control button on the liftgate until you hear a tone, indicating programming is complete. Note: You can only use the liftgate control button to program the height. When Opening The system stops when it detects an obstacle and a tone sounds. Once you remove the obstacle, you can continue to operate the liftgate. Note: You cannot program the height if the liftgate position is too low. Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped) Make sure you have an intelligent access transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate. The new open liftgate height is recalled when the power liftgate is opened. To change the programmed height, repeat the above procedure. Once you open the power liftgate, you can manually move it to a different height. Note: The system recalls the new programmed height until you reprogram it, even if you disconnect the battery. When operating the power liftgate after you have programmed a lower height than fully open, you can fully open the liftgate by manually pushing it upward to the maximum open position. Obstacle Detection When Closing The system stops when it detects an obstacle. A tone sounds and the system reverses to open. Once you remove the obstacle, you can power close the liftgate. E174120 63 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks 1. Move your foot under and away from the rear bumper detection area in a single-kick motion. Do not move your foot sideways or the sensors may not detect the motion. 2. The liftgate powers open or close. Note: Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or reverse its direction. Manually interfering with the liftgate motion may also replicate a gas strut failure. Note: Splashing water may cause the hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the intelligent access key away from the rear bumper detection area when washing your vehicle. 64 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Security Replacement Keys PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters or two intelligent access keys. SecuriLock® The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts your vehicle, as well as a remote control. The system helps prevent your vehicle from starting unless you use a coded key programmed to your vehicle. Using the wrong key may prevent your vehicle from starting. A message may appear in the information display. The intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates the driver door lock and activates the intelligent access with push button start system, as well as a remote control. If you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly coded key, a malfunction has happened. A message may appear in the information display. If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys (integrated keyhead transmitters only) are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You need to erase the key codes from your vehicle and program new coded keys. Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to the key when starting your vehicle. Prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart your vehicle if a problem occurs. Store an extra programmed key away from your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences. See your authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys. Programming a Spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Note: You can program a maximum of eight coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters. Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in your vehicle. Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle. You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitter or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program both the vehicle immobilizer keycode and the remote entry portion of the remote control to your vehicle Automatic Arming Your vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off. Automatic Disarming Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms your vehicle. Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys. 65 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Security You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are not available. Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key See your authorized dealer to have additional keys programmed to your vehicle. Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped) Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Switch the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Switch the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key into the ignition. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition. The system warns you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It triggers if any door, the luggage compartment or the hood opens without using the key or remote control. The direction indicators flash and the horn sounds if unauthorized entry is attempted while the alarm is armed. Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle. Arming the Alarm The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in the ignition. Electronically lock the vehicle to arm the alarm. Disarming the Alarm Disarm the alarm by any of the following actions: • • • If the key has been successfully programmed it will start your vehicle and operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter). Note: Pressing the panic button on the remote control will stop the horn and signal indicators, but will not disarm the system. If programming was not successful, wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. If you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to your authorized dealer. 66 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unlock the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control or keyless entry keypad. Switch the ignition on or start the vehicle. Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock the vehicle, then switch the ignition on within 12 seconds. Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 113). 2 3 E95179 3. Lock the steering column. AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped) 1 Select the required source on the audio unit. 2 You can operate the following functions with the control: E95178 1. Unlock the steering column. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. 67 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Steering Wheel VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped) A D C B E129463 A Volume up. B Seek up or next. C Volume down. D Seek down or previous. E129464 Pull the control to select or deselect voice control. CRUISE CONTROL Seek, Next or Previous Press the seek button to: • Tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset. • Play the next or the previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: • Tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band. • Seek through a track. E142437 See Using Cruise Control (page 179). 68 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Steering Wheel INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL E130248 See Information Displays (page 93). Multimedia Controls E145434 Use the arrows on the right side of the steering wheel to navigate through the information display menus. Press OK to make a selection. 69 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wipers and Washers Intermittent Wipe WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers and vehicle power off before using an automatic car wash. Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper Blades (page 229). If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 229). E197526 Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. A Short-wipe interval. B Intermittent wipe. C Long-wipe interval. Push the wiper lever up to switch the wipers on, and then use the rotary control to adjust the intermittent wipe interval. Speed Dependent Wipers (If Equipped) When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes decreases. AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped) Note: Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers. E197525 A Single wipe. B Intermittent wipe. C Normal wipe. D High-speed wipe. Note: Check your wipers before you enter a car wash to make sure you switched them off. The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor. You can find it in the area around the interior mirror. The rain sensor monitors the amount of moisture on the windshield and automatically turns on the wipers. It adjusts the wiper speed by the amount of moisture that the sensor detects on the windshield. Note: Move to position O marked on the wiper lever to switch off. 70 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wipers and Washers Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor: • Rotate the control down to low sensitivity, and the wipers turn on when the rain sensor detects a large amount of moisture on the windshield. • When you move the wiper lever up to the first position and the autowiper system is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting adjusts the wiper speed according to the moisture on the windshield only. • When you lower the sensitivity, the wipers remain in their ready position only. They do not wipe the windshield automatically unless the sensor detects moisture. • Move the wiper lever position up to the second position to wipe the windshield on-demand. • Rotate the control up to high sensitivity, and the wipers turn on when the rain sensor detects a small amount of moisture on the windshield. • When you set the wiper control to a higher sensitivity, the wipers wipe the windshield once. • Remember to move the wiper lever position up to the second position to wipe the windshield on-demand. E197526 A Highest sensitivity. B On. C Lowest sensitivity. Switch the autowipers on by moving the wiper lever up to the first position. Switch the autowipers off by moving the wiper lever down. The autowipers feature is active and ready when the wiper lever is in the first position and selected in the information display. You can change the autowipers feature to intermittent wipers through the information display. See General Information (page 93). 71 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wipers and Washers Note: Check your wiper function in the information display. See General Information (page 93). The autowipers feature functions only when you select the menu choice in the information display and you move the wiper lever up to the first position. The autowipers feature then remains on in the information display menu until you change it to intermittent wipe. WINDSHIELD WASHERS Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Note: If you switch autolamps on in conjunction with autowipers, your low beam headlamps turn on automatically when the rain sensor activates the windshield wipers continuously. See Autolamps (page 75). Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield. E197528 To operate the washers and spray the windshield, pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever, the wipers will operate for a short time. Wet or winter driving conditions with ice, snow or salty road mist can cause inconsistent and unexpected wiping or smearing. In these conditions, you can do the following to help keep your windshield clear: • Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers to reduce the amount of smearing. • Switch to normal or high-speed wipe by moving the wiper lever up. • Switch the autowipers off and switch intermittent mode on through the information display. See General Information (page 93). • Switch the autowipers off by moving the wiper lever down. REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS Rear Window Wiper Note: Make sure you switch the rear window wiper and ignition off before using an automatic car wash. Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 229). E197647 72 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A Intermittent wipe. B Low speed wipe. C Off. Wipers and Washers Press the top of the button to switch intermittent wipe on. Press the top of the button again to switch low speed wipe on. Press the bottom of the button to switch the rear window wiper off. When you switch on the front wipers and move the gearshift lever to reverse (R), rear intermittent wipe automatically turns on. Rear Window Washer E197529 Push the lever away from you to operate the rear window washer. When you release the lever, wiping continues for a short period of time. 73 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL Condensation in Lamp Assemblies Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. E142449 Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions. Examples of acceptable condensation are: • The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, drip marks or large droplets). • A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens. A Off. B Parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and tail lamps. C Headlamps. High Beams Examples of unacceptable condensation are: • A water puddle inside the lamp. • Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens. If you see any unacceptable condensation, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. E162679 Push the lever away from you to switch the high beam on. Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off. 74 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting Headlamp Flasher If equipped, the following also activate when the lighting control is in the autolamps position and you switch them on in the information display: • Configurable daytime running lamps. • Automatic high beam control. • Adaptive headlamp control. The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps remain on. See Information Displays (page 93). E162680 Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps position, you cannot switch the high beam headlamps on until the autolamps system turns the low beam headlamps on. Slightly pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the headlamps. AUTOLAMPS Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps WARNING The autolamps switch position may not activate the headlamps in all low visibility conditions, such as daytime fog. Always ensure that your headlamps are switched to auto or on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a collision. The windshield wiper activated headlamps turn on within 10 seconds when you switch the windshield wipers on and the lighting control is in the autolamps position. They turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off. The headlamps will not turn on by wiper activation: • During a mist wipe. • When the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash condition. • If the wipers are in intermittent mode. Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers on, the headlamps will automatically turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate. E142451 When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps automatically turn on in low light situations or when the wipers activate. 75 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER B A Note: If you disconnect the battery or it becomes discharged, the illuminated components will switch to the maximum setting. Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps E165366 A Press repeatedly or press and hold to dim. B Press repeatedly or press and hold to brighten. HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY After you switch the ignition off, you can switch the headlamps on by pulling the direction indicator lever toward you. You will hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch off automatically after three minutes with any door open or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed. You can cancel this feature by pulling the direction indicator toward you again or switching the ignition on. E132712 Press repeatedly or press and hold until the desired level is reached. 76 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting 4. The lighting control is in the autolamps position. 5. The headlamps are off. DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS WARNING The other lighting control switch positions do not activate the daytime running lamps, and you can use them to temporarily override autolamp control. The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Also, the autolamps switch position may not activate the headlamps in all low visibility conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure the headlamps are switched to auto or on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash. When switched off in the information display, the daytime running lamps are off in all lighting control switch positions. FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped) Type 1 - Conventional (NonConfigurable) The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. The ignition is switched to the on position. 2. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions or the parking brake is released for vehicles with manual transmissions. 3. The lighting control is in the off, parking lamp or autolamps positions. 4. The headlamps are off. E142453 Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off. You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except Off and the high beams are not on. Type 2 - Configurable Switch the daytime running lamps on or off using the information display controls. See Information Displays (page 93). The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. They are switched on in the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). 2. The ignition is switched to the on position. 3. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions or the parking brake is released for vehicles with manual transmissions. 77 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting (A) Door function switch. Press this switch to disable the interior E160819 lamps. The door function indicator lamp will illuminate yellow with lamps disabled. Press the switch again to turn interior lamps back on. The indicator lamp will illuminate blue. DIRECTION INDICATORS (B) All lamps on and off switch. E160816 (C)Passenger individual lamp on and off switch. E160817 (D) Driver individual lamp on and off switch. E162681 Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators. E160818 Front Interior Lamp - With Panorama Roof (If Equipped) Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change. Driver Side Lamp INTERIOR LAMPS A The lamps will switch on when one of the following conditions have been met: • • • You open any door. You press a remote control button. You press switch B on the front interior lamp. C Front Interior Lamp (If Equipped) C B E142454 (A) Door function switch. Press this switch to disable the interior E160819 lamps. The door function indicator lamp will illuminate yellow with lamps disabled. Press the switch again to turn interior lamps back on. The indicator lamp will illuminate blue. D (B) All lamps on and off switch. B A E160816 (C) Individual lamp on and off switch. E161163 E160818 78 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting Passenger Side Lamp A A B C E142456 E142455 (A) Individual lamp on and off switch. E160818 Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped) A Color palette B Control knob C Search mode Rotate B past the first detent to switch on and adjust to the desired brightness. Press A to cycle through the color choices. A B Press C to switch on all interior lamps and the ambient lighting. Press C again to switch off the interior lamps and return the ambient lighting to the previously selected color. The ambient lighting will switch on when the following conditions have been met: • you switch the ignition on • you switch the headlamps on E190496 (A)Passenger side lamp on and off switch. The ambient lighting will remain on until you switch the ignition off and one of the following conditions have been met: • you lock your vehicle • the accessory delay timer expires. E160817 (B)Driver side lamp on and off switch. E160818 AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped) The ambient lighting system illuminates the interior with a choice of several colors. The ambient lighting control is located in the overhead console. 79 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Windows and Mirrors Window Lock POWER WINDOWS WARNINGS Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves. When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. E70850 Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. It illuminates when you lock the rear window controls. Bounce-Back (If Equipped) The window will stop automatically while closing. It will reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way. Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature WARNING E70848 When you override the bounce-back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle. Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open. Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise. Press the switch to open the window. Lift the switch to close the window. Proceed as follows to override this protection feature when there is a resistance, for example in winter: One-Touch Down Press the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window. 1. One-Touch Up Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the window. 80 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Close the window twice until it reaches the point of resistance and let it reverse. Windows and Mirrors 2. Close the window a third time to the point of resistance. The bounce-back feature is now disabled and you can close the window manually. The window will go past the point of resistance and you can close it fully. GLOBAL OPENING You can use the remote control to operate the windows with the ignition off. Note: To operate this feature, accessory delay must not be active. See an authorized dealer as soon as possible if the window does not close after the third attempt. Opening the Windows You can use the global opening feature to open the windows only for a short time after you unlock your vehicle by using the remote control. Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature WARNING The bounce-back feature remains turned off until you reset the memory. To use the global opening feature: 1. Press and release the remote control unlock button. 2. Press the remote control unlock button again and hold it for approximately three seconds. Release the control when the windows begin to open. 3. Press the lock or unlock button on your remote control to stop the window opening function. If you have disconnected the battery, you must reset the bounce-back memory separately for each window. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Lift and hold the switch until the window is fully closed. Release the switch. Lift the switch again for one more second. Press and hold the switch until the window is fully open. Release the switch. Lift and hold the switch until the window is fully closed. Open the window and then try to close it automatically. Reset and repeat the procedure if the window does not close automatically. Note: Contact an authorized Ford dealer to deactivate this feature. EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exterior Mirrors WARNING Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. Accessory Delay (If Equipped) You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door. 81 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Windows and Mirrors Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped) See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 111). Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear. C A B E70846 A Left-hand mirror B Off C Right-hand mirror Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to increase your visibility along the side of your vehicle. Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you intend to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes. E70847 Press the arrows to adjust the mirror. Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position. Signal Indicator Mirrors The outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing blinks when you activate the turn signal. 82 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Windows and Mirrors Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning products. You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side. C Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night. Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped) Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor. B The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up. A E138665 The image of the approaching vehicle is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror when it is at a distance. The image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror as the vehicle approaches (A). The image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle will transition to your peripheral field of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C). SUN VISORS Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped) INTERIOR MIRROR WARNING Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving. E162197 Lift the cover to switch the lamp on. 83 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Windows and Mirrors SUN SHADES (If Equipped) Sun Shade Relearning WARNINGS Do not let children play with the sun shade or leave them unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves. The bounce-back function is not active during this procedure. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the way of the moving sun shade. WARNING When closing the sun shade, you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the sunshade. Note: You must start the relearning process within 30 seconds of switching the ignition on. In case the sun shade no longer opens or closes properly, follow this relearning procedure: The control is located in the overhead console. 1. Press the front of the control to the first action point twice and release it within two seconds. 2. Press the rear of the control to the first action point twice and release it within two seconds. 3. Press and hold the front of the control to the first action point, until the sun shade fully opens. 4. Press and hold the rear of the control to the first action point, until the sun shade fully closes. The sun shade has a one-touch open and close feature. To stop motion during one-touch operation, press the control a second time. Opening and Closing the Sun Shade If you do not complete Step 2 within 15 seconds of Step 1, the relearning function end. Switch the ignition off, wait for another 30 seconds and then switch the ignition back on again. Start the procedure again from the beginning. E138668 Fully press and release the front of the control to open the sun shade. Confirm that relearning was successful by opening and closing the sun shade. Fully press and release the rear of the control to close the sun shade. Bounce-Back The sun shade will stop automatically while closing. It will reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way. 84 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Instrument Cluster GAUGES A B C E162393 A Left Information Display B Speedometer C Right Information Display Charge Fill (Hybrid Mode) Left Information Display The fill level, or State of Charge indicates the amount of energy stored in the high voltage battery as a percent of total energy capacity. The level will increase or decrease as the battery charges and discharges during normal operation. Odometer Located in the bottom of the information display. Registers the accumulated distance your vehicle has traveled. Battery Gauge: Charge Fill (Energi Plug-in Power Mode) Note: For Energi vehicles there are two versions of the battery gauge. When your vehicle is in hybrid mode, a simple battery graphic displays your battery information. When your vehicle is in plug-in power mode, an enhanced battery graphic displays your battery information. The fill level indicates the amount of energy stored in the high voltage battery which is available for Plug-in Power Mode. A full fill represents the total amount of energy you can get from an external charge (plugging your vehicle in). When the fill reaches empty your vehicle will automatically enter Hybrid Mode. The high voltage battery gauge provides Charge Fill (State of Charge), Charge Assist and Regen Active information. 85 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Instrument Cluster Charge Assist Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will indicate approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located. The up and down arrows provide information about the energy going into and out of the high voltage battery. The up arrow above the battery indicates battery charging such as from regenerative braking. The down arrow below the battery indicates battery discharging to provide power for propulsion or vehicle accessories. The needle should move toward F when you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle needs service soon. Regen Active After refueling some variability in needle position is normal: A circular arrow symbol appears in the center of the battery gauge when energy is being recaptured through the regenerative braking system. • This feature can be switched on or off in the information displays settings menu. See General Information (page 93). • Fuel Gauge: Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient. • It may take a short time for the needle to reach F after leaving the gas station. This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station. The fuel amount dispensed into the tank is a little less or more than the gauge indicated. This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station. If the gas station nozzle shuts off before the tank is full, try a different gas pump nozzle. Low Fuel Reminder A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel gauge needle is at 1/16th. Variations: Driving type (fuel economy conditions) Fuel gauge position Distance-to-empty Highway driving 1/16th 35–80 mi (56–129 km) Severe duty driving (trailer towing, extended idle) 1/16th 35 mi (56 km) Information Vehicle Settings and Personalization See General Information (page 93). Display/Trip Settings See General Information (page 93). See General Information (page 93). 86 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Instrument Cluster Brake Coach Display: Note: Corresponding trip efficiency leaves appear on the right information display upon shutting off your Hybrid vehicle. On Energi vehicles the trip efficiency leaves are shown on the right information display when the vehicle operates in Hybrid Mode for the entire trip. For trips with Plug-in Power Mode operation an estimate of your EV Range/Full Charge is provided along with a listing of factors and their contributions to this estimate. See Next Full Charge under Right Information Display in this chapter. The Brake Coach appears after the vehicle has come to a stop. It coaches you to brake in a manner which maximizes the amount of energy returned through the regenerative braking system. The percent displayed is an indication of the regenerative braking efficiency with 100% representing the maximum amount of energy recovery. This feature can be switched on or off in the information displays settings menu. See General Information (page 93). Right Information Display Trip Summary: Entertainment The Trip Summary displays upon shutting off your vehicle. The information is cumulative over the last trip. A new trip begins each time you start your vehicle (when the Ready to Drive message comes on). See your SYNC information. • See your SYNC information. • • Navigation or Compass See your SYNC information. Phone Distance - Displays the total distance traveled, distance traveled on battery power only (EV distance) and Regen distance. Regen distance is the estimated range gained from energy recaptured through regenerative braking. Energy Use - Displays the average fuel economy. In addition for Energi, displays the total electrical energy used while in Plug-in Power Mode in kilowatt hours (kWh). Brake Score - The percent displayed is an indication of the regenerative braking efficiency for the trip. Fuel Economy See General Information (page 93). Vehicle Range Vehicle range indicates the estimated distance your vehicle will travel with the energy currently onboard. The range is displayed at the bottom of the screen with gasoline range shown in white and electric range (Energi only) shown in blue. • • 87 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Gasoline Range: Is the estimated distance to empty based on the fuel remaining in the tank. Electric Range: Is the estimated distance you can travel in Plug-In Power Mode with the engine off. This range is based on a calculation determined by the amount of energy stored in the high voltage battery as a result of charging while plugged in and the energy being used while driving. Instrument Cluster Miles or kilometers per full charge The amount of energy being used while driving is affected by: • • • • • • This is an estimate of the EV Range you would see if you plugged in and fully charged your vehicle right now. The estimate is based on your energy usage while driving. Energy usage is affected by your driving style and route, climate control use, outside temperature and other factors. Mild or aggressive acceleration or braking. Your vehicle speed. Your use of accessories such as climate control. The ambient temperature and other weather conditions. City or highway driving. Road grades. Energy usage effects (+/-) A green bar indicates a positive effect on your EV range per full charge estimate. An amber bar indicates a negative effect. The bigger the bar the bigger the effect on your estimate. Note: It is normal for vehicle range estimates to vary due to changes in average energy usage. This is why you will typically see different range estimates each time you fill up your fuel tank or fully charge your battery. • Trip Efficiency Leaves Trip Efficiency Leaves display upon shutting off your Hybrid vehicle. For Energi vehicles the trip efficiency leaves are displayed only when the vehicle operates in Hybrid for the entire trip. The number of leaves represent the average for the last trip. A new trip begins each time you start your vehicle (when the Ready to Drive message comes on). Corresponding Trip Summary data displays on the left information display. • • Next Full Charge The Next Full Charge display is shown upon shutting off your Energi vehicle whenever your vehicle operates in Plug-in Power Mode for a portion of your trip. 88 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving style/route – This includes energy used to propel your vehicle based on your driving style and route. Your driving style includes how fast you drive and whether your acceleration and braking is mild or aggressive. Your route includes factors such as the amount of city or highway driving and road grades. Climate control use – This includes energy used by your vehicle’s high voltage climate control components such as the electric A/C compressor and the electric heater. Outside temp./other – This includes energy losses due to outside temperature and other conditions which reduce vehicle system efficiency. Energy used for low voltage accessories such as cabin fans, heated seats, headlights, etc. is also included. Instrument Cluster WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS WARNING Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury. The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lamps will light when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information. Cruise Control (If Equipped) Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start your vehicle. Lights when you switch on this feature. E71340 Anti-Lock Braking System Direction Indicator If it lights when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You will continue to have normal braking (without anti-lock braking system) unless the brake system warning lamp also lights. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Lights when you switch on the left or right direction indicator or hazard warning flasher. If the indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 232). Battery Door Ajar Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely closed. If it lights while driving, this indicates a malfunction. Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. EcoSelect Brake System E144522 E194390 Lights when you engage the parking brake with the ignition on. Engine and Motor Coolant Temperature If it lights when you are driving, check that you do not have the parking brake engaged. If you do not have the parking brake engaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked immediately by an authorized dealer. Lights when the engine or motor coolant temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. 89 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lights when you switch on this feature. See Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 135). Instrument Cluster Engine Oil High Beam If it lights with the engine running or while you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 222). Lights when you switch the high beam headlamps on. It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher. Liftgate Ajar Note: Do not resume your journey if it lights despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Lights when the liftgate is not completely closed. E162453 Low Battery (If Equipped) EV Now E144814 Lights when the battery level is low. You may also see a E144691 message suggesting you reduce your usage of the climate system. Lights when you select this feature on. See Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 137). EV Later E151263 Low Fuel Level Lights when you select this feature on. See Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 137). Lights when the fuel level is low or the fuel tank is nearly empty. Refuel as soon as possible. Fasten Safety Belt Low Tire Pressure Warning It will light and a tone will sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt. See Seatbelt Reminder (page 31). Lights when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving, check your tire pressure as soon as possible. Front Airbag If it fails to light when you start your vehicle, continues to flash or remains on, this indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. It also lights momentarily when you switch on the ignition to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not light when you switch on the ignition, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped) Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist (If Equipped) Lights when you switch the front fog lamps on. E162456 turns on. 90 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lights when the overdrive function in the transmission turns off and the grade assist Instrument Cluster Parking Lamps If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately. Lights when you switch the parking lamps on. Powertrain Fault WARNING Lights when the system detects a powertrain or high-voltage charge system fault. If the indicator stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately. Note: If your vehicle detects certain faults, it will not allow you to operate the accelerator pedal. If this happens, press the brake pedal and release it. This will activate limp home vehicle operation. In limp home vehicle operation, your vehicle will accelerate in a controlled manner up to a maximum speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) on a flat surface. If you apply the brake pedal or move the transmission to neutral (N) you can override your vehicle’s acceleration. The service engine soon indicator lights when you first switch on the ignition prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection and Maintenance testing. Normally, the service engine soon light will stay on until you switch on the engine, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for Inspection and Maintenance testing. See Emission Control System (page 150). Ready to Drive Lights after your switch your vehicle on and it is ready to drive. A corresponding message may display stating ready to drive. E144692 Stability Control Lights when the system is active. If it remains on or does not light E138639 when you switch the ignition on, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction, the system will turn off. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. See Using Stability Control (page 169). Service Engine Soon If the service engine soon indicator light stays on after you switch on the engine, this indicates that the On-Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emissions control system. Refer to On-Board diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more information about having your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control System (page 150). 91 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Instrument Cluster Stability Control Off Headlamps On Warning Chime Lights when you switch the system off. It will go out when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off. See Using Stability Control (page 169). Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver's door and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on. Stop Safely Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle. If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Parking Brake On Warning Chime Indicates an electrical component fault or failure that E144693 will cause the vehicle to shutdown or enter into a limited operating mode. A message may also display. Automatic Transmission Warning Chime Vehicle Plugged in (If Equipped) Sounds when you have not moved the transmission selector lever to position P. A message will be shown in the display. Lights after you plug in your vehicle. A corresponding message may display after attempting to start the vehicle. E144694 AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Key in Ignition Warning Chime Sounds when you open the driver's door and you have left the key in the ignition. Engine On Warning Chime A warning chime will sound when any door is opened if the vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed. Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped) Sounds the horn twice when you exit the vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN, indicating the vehicle is still on. 92 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays • GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING • Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. • • • Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu. Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button). Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages. Main menu From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display, you can choose from the following categories: Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is displayed in the information display. Display/Trip E144639 Information E144642 Left Information Display Controls Settings E100023 Scroll up or down to highlight one of the categories, and then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that category. Press the left arrow key as needed to exit back to the main menu. Display/Trip E162394 E144639 Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose between the following display options. Note: The cluster will remember the menu level 2 state when you change the key state from the RUN to the OFF position. 93 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Display/Trip Menu level 2 Menu level 3 Menu level 4 Menu level 5 Engage (Split Power + Avg Fuel Economy + Battery Gauge + Fuel Gauge) Instantaneous Fuel — — Empower (Power (with engine on/off threshold) + Avg Fuel Economy + Battery Gauge + Fuel Gauge) Instantaneous Fuel — — MyView (MyView + Battery Gauge + Fuel Gauge) Change MyView Vehicle Range Vehicle Range Average Fuel Average Fuel Split Power Instantaneous Fuel Power + Threshold Coolant Temp. Miles (or km)/Full Charge (Energi only) Shown in Plug-in Power Mode Help Help Tach rpm x1000 Accessory Power Accessory Power Trip 1 Trip 1 Trip 2 Trip 2 Fuel History Fuel History Coach Coach Blank Blank — Help — — Help — — 94 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Display/Trip (avg miles(or km)/full charge + instant miles(or km)/full charge gauge + battery gauge + fuel gauge) Fuel Economy (Energi only) Shown in Hybrid Mode (avg fuel economy + instant fuel economy gauge + battery gauge + fuel gauge) Help Trip 1: Trip Data + Battery Gauge + Fuel Gauge Help — — Trip 2: Trip Data + Battery Gauge + Fuel Gauge • Engage Engage provides separate gauges for engine power and high voltage battery power in kilowatts (kW). The engine power gauge fill is white and the high voltage battery power gauge fill is blue. You can also see an instantaneous fuel economy gauge. When your vehicle is operating on battery power only, you will see EV displayed and the gauges will appear in blue. • • • Empower Empower provides a power demand gauge in kilowatts (kW) which includes an engine on or off threshold. When your vehicle is operating with battery power only (below the threshold), you will see EV displayed and the gauge fill is blue. When your vehicle is operating with both the engine and the high voltage battery providing power the gauge fill is white. When power demand surpasses the amber indicator, this level of demand and associated fuel economy displays in amber. When the engine is on, reducing power demand to less than the threshold will allow the engine to turn off. You can also see an instantaneous fuel economy gauge. Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. 95 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays MyView • Coolant Temp – Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator will be white and will be in the normal range (between H and C). If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, the level indicator will change to red to indicate that the engine is overheating. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn your vehicle off and let the engine cool. • Tach rpm x 1000 — When the gasoline engine is running, the tachometer gauge displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). When your vehicle is operating on battery power only with the engine off, EV displays and the tachometer is greyed out. You can choose what to display in this view. Selecting Change MyView in the options menu allows you to scroll through two columns of content choices. • • • Press the up or down arrow to view content. Press OK to save your selected content. You must select content in both columns before you can save your new MyView. Unique content available in MyView: • Vehicle Range (Energi vehicles only) – Indicates the estimated distance your vehicle will travel with the energy currently onboard. Separately displays range available in Hybrid Mode fueled by gasoline, electric range available in Plug-in Power Mode, and total range. Gasoline range and electric range are also shown on the bottom of the right information display. Changes in driving pattern and climate control use will cause the values to vary. • Accessory Power— Indicates electrical power demands from your vehicle’s accessory systems. Accessories use power but do not contribute to propelling your vehicle. The gauge separately displays power demand in kilowatts (kW) for climate and other accessories. Climate includes the power being used by high voltage climate control components such as the electric A/C compressor and the electric heater (Energi vehicles only). Other includes all power being used by the low voltage accessories (cabin fans, headlights, heated seats, etc.). Note: The trip data, and average fuel economy cannot be reset in MyView. Miles (or km)/Full Charge (Energi only) In Hybrid Mode the display changes to Fuel Economy. Miles or Kilometers per Full Charge is an estimate of your EV Range with a fully charged battery. This display is only available in Plug-in Power Mode. Average Miles or Kilometers per Full Charge is provided along with an Instantaneous gauge. This information is based on your energy usage while driving. Energy usage is affected by your driving style and route, climate control use, outside temperature and other factors. For more information refer to Next Full Charge. See Gauges (page 85). When you select EV Now operation this screen will automatically be shown. You can press OK to enable the engine when viewing this screen during EV Now operation. See Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 137). 96 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Fuel Economy (Energi only) Trip 1 & 2 This display is only available in Hybrid Mode. In Plug-in Power Mode the display changes to Miles (or km)/Full Charge. Provides trip odometer, trip average fuel economy and trip timer. Distance traveled on battery power only with the engine off is shown in blue next to total trip distance. An Instant Fuel Economy gauge is provided along with Avg Fuel Economy. While viewing this screen you can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. For more information see Common Displays in this chapter. For Energi vehicles total plug-in electricity used in kilowatt hours (kWh) is shown in blue next to trip average fuel economy. Info In this mode, you can view different vehicle system information and perform a system check. E144642 Information Tutorial Displays a number of different system tutorials. Use the up/down arrows to scroll through the tutorials. Then press OK to view. MyKey MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed) MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a programmed MyKey) Admin Keys (Number of admin keys) System Check All active warnings will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the list. Settings In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. E100023 Note: Some items are optional and may not appear. Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set. 97 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Settings Menu level 2 Menu level 3 Menu level 4 Menu level 5 Driver Assist Vehicle Traction Ctrl On or Off — ECO Cruise On or Off — EV+ Mode On or Off — Rear Park Aid On or Off — Tire Monitor Hold OK to Reset — Auto Engine Off On or Off — Lighting Auto Light Rain On or Off Daytime Lights On or Off Home Light Select time interval Remote Start Climate Control Tire Mobility Kit MyKey Menu level 6 Heater - A/C Auto or Last Settings Front Defrost Auto or Off Rear Defrost Auto or Off Driver Seat Auto or Off Passenger Seat Auto or Off Duration 5, 10 or 15 minutes Quiet Start On or Off System Enable or Disable Select number of years — Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey — Traction Control — Always On or User Selectable 98 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Settings Display Max Speed Choose desired speed or off — Speed Warning Choose desired speed or off — Volume Limiter On or Off — Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys — Language Select the desired language — Units Distance Select the desired units of measure Temperature Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C) Brake Coach On or Off — Regen Active On or Off — Charge Assist On or Off — Driving History Hold OK to Reset — • Right Information Display Controls • • • Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu. Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. Press the OK button to choose and confirm your selection. Main menu From the main menu bar on the right side of the information display, you can choose from the following categories: E179398 99 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Entertainment Phone See your SYNC information. See your SYNC information. Navigation or Compass Fuel Economy See your SYNC information. Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose between the following display options. Note: The information display will remember the menu level 2 state when you change the individual key state from the RUN to the OFF position. Fuel Economy Menu level 2 Efficiency Leaves Fuel History (Instantaneous Fuel Economy + Fuel Economy History + Avg Fuel Economy) Coach Menu level 3 Menu level 4 Menu level 5 Help — — Duration 5, 10 or 30 minutes — Help — — Help — — duration for the 5 intervals. You can select total duration in the options menu. Intervals shown in grey color are from the previous drive. The blue horizontal line represents the average fuel economy value shown to the right. Efficiency Leaves Efficiency leaves indicate short term driving efficiency measured over the last few minutes. The more leaves and vines that appear on the display, the better your fuel economy. Leaves and vines will occasionally appear and disappear to indicate a change in your driving efficiency. Note: Hold OK to reset average fuel economy. Coach Fuel History This view provides a comparison of your recent acceleration, braking and cruising behavior, then recommends the most efficient use of energy under present conditions. The horizontal bars fill from left to right with best behavior and appear blue when at least half full. When the bars are less than half full, the color is amber, suggesting that you need a change in your driving behavior to achieve better energy efficiency. From left to right this view includes an instantaneous fuel economy gauge, historical fuel economy data and average fuel economy. The historical data represents an average over time intervals of either 1, 2 or 6 minutes, with the leftmost interval being the most recent. Shown at the bottom of the view is the total time 100 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Note: Fuel Economy will be impacted by your use of brakes, accelerator and accessories, as well as environmental conditions such as hills and weather. INFORMATION MESSAGES Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not all of the messages display or are available. Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have. Note: Fuel economy is not always a measure of appropriate driving behavior. For example, when driving uphill and maintaining an appropriate speed, your instant fuel economy may not be good (losing leaves) but the Coach may show a blue bar for Acceleration and Cruising. Common Displays Both Average fuel economy and an instantaneous fuel economy gauge are included in Engage, Empower, MyView (if selected) and Fuel Economy (shown in Hybrid Mode) on the left information display. They are also included in Fuel History on the right information display. Average Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy is continuously averaged since the last reset. You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the corresponding steering wheel controls. For Energi vehicles both Hybrid and Plug-in Power mode operation will be included in the calculation. Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. Other messages are be removed automatically after a short time. Note: Average fuel economy cannot be reset in MyView. Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus. E130248 Instantaneous Fuel Economy If your instantaneous fuel economy is greater than the maximum value displayed, a + sign will be shown next to the maximum scale number. When your vehicle is operating on battery power only, EV will display and the gauge fill will show in blue. 101 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays AdvanceTrac® Message Service AdvanceTrac Action Displayed when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Alarm Message Action Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle. Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 66). Battery and Charging System (High Voltage) Message Action Vehicle Plugged In ? Yes Your vehicle needs confirmation it is unplugged before allowing a start. You must make sure your vehicle is unplugged No and you respond to the message prompt before starting your vehicle. Unplug Prior to Starting Your vehicle detects it is still plugged in and you attempt to Vehicle start it. Ready to Drive Ready to Drive XXX% Charged Your vehicle is ready to drive. Your vehicle is ready to drive. You have XXX% plug-in energy available. EV Now Battery Powered You selected EV Now mode with the EV button. EV Later XX% Plug-in Energy Reserved You selected EV Later mode with the EV button. Auto EV Normal Opera- You selected Auto EV mode with the EV button. tion EV Now Not Available EV Now is unavailable. 102 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Message Engine Enabled Due to Defrost Setting Engine Enabled for System Performance Press OK to Enable Engine Action Your vehicle enables the engine due to the climate control defrost setting. This is normal operation. Your vehicle enables the engine for system performance. This is normal operation. You can press OK to enable the engine temporarily for increased performance when in EV Now mode. Doors Message Action X Door Ajar Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and the vehicle is moving. Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed. Liftgate Ajar Displays when the liftgate is not completely closed. Fuel Message Fuel Level Low Action An early reminder of a low fuel condition. Fuel Freshness Engine EV functionality is disabled and the engine is running to may run to maintain fuel maintain fuel freshness. See Fuel Quality (page 144). freshness Fuel Door Opening Wait for up to 15 seconds while the fuel system depressurizes. Fuel Door Open The fuel system has finished depressurizing and you can begin to refuel. Close Fuel Door A reminder to close the fuel door. Refuel Error See Manual There is an error in attempting to refill your vehicle. Hill Start Assist Message Hill Start Assist Not Available Action Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 165). 103 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Keys and Intelligent Access Message Action Starting System Fault This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See your authorized dealer for service. Key Inside vehicle Displays to remind you that the key is in the luggage compartment. See Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 137). Key Not Inside vehicle Displays if the key is not detected by the system. See PlugIn Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 137). No Key Detected Displayed if the key is not detected by the system. See PlugIn Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 137). Restart Now or Key is Needed Displayed when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and a Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle. Accessory Power is Active Displayed when the vehicle is in the Accessory ignition state. To START Press Brake Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle. Press Brake + Start Button Displayed as a reminder to apply the brake and push the start button to start the vehicle. Place Key in Backup Location Displayed as needed by the system for proper function. Key Programmed x Keys Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent Total access key is programmed to the system. Max Number of Keys Learned Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum number of keys have been programmed. Could Not Program Integrated Key Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. 104 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Maintenance Message Action Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Change Engine Oil Soon Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 222). Oil Change Required Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 222). Brake Fluid Level Low Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 227). Check Brake System Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer. Engine Coolant Over Temperature Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively high. Motor Coolant Over Temperature Displays when the motor coolant temperature is excessively high. Service Tire Mobility Kit Displayed when the kit needs service. See your authorized dealer. See Manual Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction. Engine ON Due to Low Use Normal Operation Displays when EV functionality is disabled and the engine is running to maintain oil quality. See Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 137). MyKey Message Action MyKey not Created Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be programmed. MyKey Active Drive Safely Displays when MyKey is active. Near Vehicle Top Speed Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h). 105 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Message Action Vehicle at Top Speed of Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is MyKey Setting reached. Check Speed Drive Safely Displays when MyKey is active. Buckle Up to Unmute Audio Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated. Traction Control On MyKey Setting Displays when a MyKey is in use and Traction control is activated. MyKey Park Aid Cannot Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated. be Deactivated Park Aid Message Check Park Aid Action Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation (page 170). Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. Check Rear Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires attention. See Principle of Operation (page 170). Check Front Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires attention. See Principle of Operation (page 170). Park Aid Fault Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation (page 170). Park Brake Message Action Park Brake Engaged Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact your authorized dealer. 106 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Power Steering Message Steering Fault Service Now Steering Loss Stop Safely Action The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See your authorized dealer. The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer. Remote Start Message Remote Start Active Action Displayed when the remote start system is active. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Action Tire Pressure Low Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 270). Tire Pressure Monitor Fault Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 270). Tire Pressure Sensor Fault Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 270). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Transmission Message Action Transmission Not in Park Displays as a reminder to shift into park. 107 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL E141422 A AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding for more than two seconds. B Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. C Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. D MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost. Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. E MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. F Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency. 108 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control G Air distribution control: Adjust to turn airflow from the windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through the following combinations: windshield, windshield/floor, panel, panel/floor, and floor. H A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off. Dual Zone Temperature Control Temperature Control Select a temperature for the passenger’s side using the rotary control on the passenger’s side. Single zone temperature control automatically switches off. The temperature on the driver’s side remains unchanged. You can now adjust the driver's side and passenger's side temperatures independently. The display shows the temperature settings for each side. Switching Back to Single Zone Temperature Control E133115 You can set the temperature between 61°F (16°C) and 86°F (30°C) in steps of 1°F (0.5°C). In position LO, 59°F (15°C), the system switches to permanent cooling. In position HI, 86°F (30°C), the system switches to permanent heating. Press and hold the AUTO button. The passenger side temperature is adjusted to the driver side temperature setting. HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE Single Zone Temperature Control General Hints In this mode, the climate control system links the temperature settings for both the driver's side and passenger's side. If you adjust the setting using the rotary control on the driver’s side, the system adjusts the temperature to the same setting on the passenger’s side. WARNING Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up. If the windows fog up, follow the settings for demisting the windshield. Note: You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting. 109 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside temperatures, or when the inside of the vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling. When the interior reaches the selected temperature, the system automatically switches to using outside air. Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on. Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. Heating the Interior Quickly Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Note: To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Recommended Settings for Heating In mild weather, you can improve your fuel economy when using the climate control system by using outside air instead of air conditioning: • Turn the temperature control knob(s) so the interior temperature is set to 59°F (15°C). • Set the air distribution to panel or floor (or both). • Press A/C to turn the air conditioning off. • Press the recirculated air button so fresh air enters the vehicle. • Press the fan button until the fan is at its lowest setting. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. Cooling the Interior Quickly Press the MAX A/C button. Recommended Settings for Cooling 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. Automatic Climate Control Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary. The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your selected temperature as quickly as possible. For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open. Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather 1. Press the defrost and panel buttons. 2. Select A/C. 3. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 4. Adjust the fan speed to a high speed setting. Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside temperatures, the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents. In addition, the fan may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up. 110 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control 5. Direct the outer instrument panel air vents toward the side windows. 6. To increase the airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the air vents in the middle of the instrument panel and in the rear of the center console. CABIN AIR FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which gives you and your passengers the following benefits: • It improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration. • It improves the interior compartment cleanliness. • It protects the climate control components from particle deposits. HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS Note: Make sure the engine is running before operating the heated windows. Your cabin air filter is located under the instrument panel in the passenger footwell area. Heated Rear Window E72507 Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times. This prevents foreign objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system. The heated rear window button is below the climate control unit. Press the button to clear the heated rear window of thin ice and fog. The heated rear window will automatically turn off after a short period of time. Replace the filter at regular intervals. See Maintenance (page 218). Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer. REMOTE START (If Equipped) Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped) The remote start feature allows you to pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The climate control system works to achieve comfort according to your previous settings. When you switch the heated rear window on, the heated exterior mirrors will automatically turn on. Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it is frozen in place. Note: You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. Turn the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings. You can now make adjustments normally, but you need to turn certain vehicle-dependent features back on, such as: • Heated seats. • Cooled seats. 111 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control • • • Heated steering wheel. Heated mirrors. Heated rear window. You can adjust the default remote start settings using the information display controls. See Information Displays (page 93). Automatic Settings In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if available, and selected to AUTO in the information display). In moderate weather, the system either heats or cools (based on previous settings). The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated seats do not automatically turn on. In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if available, and selected to AUTO in the information display). The rear defroster and heated mirrors automatically turn on. 112 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats We recommend that you follow these guidelines: • Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible. • Do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees. • Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. • Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between your breastbone and the airbag cover. • Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. • Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully. • Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNINGS Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the occupant to slide under the safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the event of a crash. Do not place objects higher than the seatback to reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of a crash or during heavy braking. Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle. HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNINGS Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving. E68595 When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash. The head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied. An improperly adjusted head restraint may not adequately protect an occupant during an impact from the rear. 113 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats The head restraints consist of: WARNINGS Install the head restraint properly to help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to its highest position. A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve adjust and unlock button. D Guide sleeve unlock and remove button. Adjusting the Head Restraint Raising the Head Restraint Front seat head restraint Pull the head restraint up. Lowering the Head Restraint 1. Press and hold button C. 2. Push the head restraint down. Removing the Head Restraint 1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches its highest position. 2. Press and hold buttons C and D. 3. Pull the head restraint up. E138642 Installing the Head Restraint Rear center seat head restraint Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. E138645 114 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints E162605 The head restraints consist of: A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve unlock and remove button. D Fold button. E144727 1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving or riding position. 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position. After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted position. Removing the Head Restraint MANUAL SEATS 1. Press and hold buttons C. 2. Pull the head restraint up. WARNING Installing the Head Restraint To reduce the risk of injury, do not adjust the driver's seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving. Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. Folding the Head Restraint 1. Press and hold button D. 2. Pull it back up to reset. Tilting Head Restraints The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the following: 115 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats Moving the Seat Backward and Forward Adjusting the Height of the Driver's Seat E70730 Recline Adjustment E162375 WARNING Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged. E163872 116 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats POWER SEATS (If Equipped) WARNING Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. Pull on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched after returning the seatback to its original position. An unlatched seat may become dangerous if you stop suddenly or have a crash. WARNINGS Do not adjust the driver's seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving. Adjusting your seatback while your vehicle is in motion may cause loss of control of your vehicle. Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped) E161564 117 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats E138647 118 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats Power Lumbar (If Equipped) REAR SEATS E138648 E155554 Folding the Seatback 1. With the seat empty, press the button on the outboard side of each rear outboard headrest to fold them. Make sure the rear center headrest is in the full down position. 2. Pull the lever up on the outboard side of the seat to fold the seat. Unfolding the Seatback Rotate the seatback upward until the seatback latches to return the seat to the upright position. 119 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped) HEATED SEATS (If Equipped) WARNING People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. E138656 Fold the armrest down to use the armrest and cupholder. Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. • Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running. Doing so can cause the battery to lose charge. E138653 Adjust the control to the desired heat setting. 120 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) HomeLink Wireless Control System WARNINGS Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage. E142657 Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor. The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home. As well as being programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be programmed to operate entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks and home or office lighting. Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515. Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming. Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons. See Erasing the Function Button Codes. In-Vehicle Programming This process is to program your hand-held transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink button. Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed, you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the Function Button Codes. Note: The programming steps below assume you will be programming HomeLink that was not previously programmed. Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This will ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. 121 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) To program additional buttons, repeat Steps 1 – 4. For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or 1-800-355-3515. Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor E142658 1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage, turn your ignition to the on position, but do not start your vehicle. 2. Hold your hand-held garage door transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from the HomeLink button you want to program. 3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release either one until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training. Note: You may need to use a different method if you live in Canada or have difficulties programming your gate operator or garage door opener. See Gate Operator / Canadian Programming. Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens on your garage door opener. E142659 1. Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor and then you have 30 seconds to complete the next two steps. 2. Return to your vehicle. 4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for two seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. If your garage door does not operate, watch the HomeLink indicator light. E142658 3. Press and hold the function button you want to program for 2 seconds, then release. Repeat this step. Depending on your brand of garage door opener, you may need to repeat this sequence a third time. If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. No further action is needed. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, the HomeLink button is not programmed yet. See Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor. 122 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) Gate Operator / Canadian Programming 1. Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights above the buttons flash rapidly. 2. When the indicator lights flash, release the buttons. The codes for all buttons are erased. Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. Reprogramming a Single Button To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps: Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating. 1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section. 1. Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release, every two seconds, your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. 2. Release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons. 3. Continue programing HomeLink. See In-Vehicle Programming. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or 1-800-355-3515. Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2 Garage Door Opener Erasing the Function Button Codes Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed to operate with the garage door opener. Note: You cannot erase individual buttons. Note: To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the transmitter into programming mode. E142660 123 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 1. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change from red to red and green. 2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. If done correctly the indicator light will turn green. A Programming HomeLink to the Genie Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor B Note: You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor. E142661 A. Red indicator light B. Green indicator light 1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change from green to red and green. 2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change to programming mode. If done properly the indicator light will appear red. 3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters) of the button on the visor you want to program. 4. Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand-held transmitter and the button you want to program. The indicator light on the visor will flash rapidly when the programming is successful. Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter will need to be pressed again. If the Genie transmitter indicator light displays green and red, release the button until the indicator light turns off before pressing the button again. E142662 1. Press and hold the program button on the garage door opener motor until both blue indicator lights turn on. 2. Release the program button. Only the smaller round indicator light should be on. 3. Press and release the program button. The larger purple indicator light will flash. Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds. 4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand-held transmitter’s previously programmed button. Both indicator lights on the garage door opener motor unit should now flash purple. Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully, the Genie transmitter must be changed out of program mode. To do this: 124 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 5. Press and hold the previously programmed button on the visor for 2 seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves. Programming is now complete. Clearing a HomeLink Device To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash. The indicator light will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which time both buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased, and the indicator light should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any of the three HomeLink buttons are pressed. FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 125 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Auxiliary Power Points 12 Volt DC Power Point Locations WARNINGS Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury. Power points may be in the following locations: • On the front of the center console. • Inside the center console. • Inside the luggage compartment. 110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped) Do not use a power point for operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect use of the power points can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury. WARNING Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury. Note: When you switch the ignition on, you can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current rating of 15 amps. If the power supply does not work after you switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on. Note: Do not hang any accessory from the accessory plug. Note: The power point will turn off when the ignition is switched off or the battery voltage drops below 11 volts. Use the power point for powering electric devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on the rear of the center console. Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow. Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use. Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. This will damage the power point and blow the fuse. Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the battery from running out of charge: • Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the vehicle is not running. • Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when you park your vehicle for extended periods. E193395 Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power point cover may open to the right or upward. 126 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Auxiliary Power Points When the indicator light on the power point is: • On: The power point is working, the ignition is on and a device is plugged in. • Off: The power point is off, the ignition is off or no device is plugged in. • Flashing: The power point is in fault mode. The power outlet temporarily turns off power when in fault mode if the device exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your device and switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on, but do not plug your device back in. Let the system cool off and switch the ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch the ignition back on and make sure the indicator light remains on. Do not use the power point for certain electric devices, including: • Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions. • Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric power tools or compressor-driven refrigerators. • Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical equipment or measuring equipment. • Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets or touch-sensor lamps. 127 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Storage Compartments Press near the rear edge of the door to open it. CENTER CONSOLE Stow items in the cup holder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking, acceleration or crashes, including hot drinks which may spill. Available console features include: A B C E142433 A Cup holder. B Storage compartment with auxiliary power point, USB port and media hub. C Auxiliary power point. OVERHEAD CONSOLE E131605 128 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine GENERAL INFORMATION IGNITION SWITCH WARNINGS Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. E72128 0 (off) - The ignition is off. Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in the ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. Do not start the vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the vehicle. I (accessory) - Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to operate while the engine is not running. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. II (on) - All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period. III (start) - starts the vehicle into Ready to Drive mode (indicated by the green "Ready to Drive" icon on the instrument cluster). KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped) The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise. Note: The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cellular phones. When you start the vehicle, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the vehicle. Note: A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the vehicle. 129 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Ignition Modes STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE When the engine starts for the first time on your drive, the idle speed increases, this helps to warm up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. Before starting the vehicle, check the following: • Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts. • Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. • Make sure the parking brake is on. • Move the transmission selector lever to position P. • Turn the ignition key to position II. If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition, see the following instructions. E142555 The keyless starting system has three modes: • Off: Turns the ignition off. • Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode, or when the vehicle is on but not moving. • On: All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. • Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once. • Start: Starts the vehicle into Ready to Drive mode (indicated by the green "Ready to Drive" icon on the instrument cluster). The engine may not start when the vehicle starts. • Press the brake pedal, and then press the button until the vehicle turns on. Vehicles with an Ignition Key Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. 1. Fully press the brake pedal. 2. Turn the key to position III to start the vehicle. Release the key when the vehicle starts. Note: Cranking may last for up to 15 seconds, or until the vehicle starts. Note: If you cannot start the vehicle on the first try, wait for a short period and try again. Vehicles with Keyless Start Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. 1. Fully press the brake pedal. 2. Press the button. 130 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine 2. With the key in this position, you can use the start button to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle. Note: The green ready indicator illuminates letting you know that the vehicle is ready for driving. Since your vehicle is equipped with a silent key start, the engine may not start at the time of the vehicle start. See Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 135). Fast Restart The fast restart feature allows you to restart the vehicle within 20 seconds of switching it off, even if a valid key is not present. The system does not function if: • The key frequencies are jammed. • The key battery has no charge. Within 20 seconds of switching the vehicle off, press the brake pedal and press the button. After 20 seconds have expired, you can no longer restart the vehicle without the key present inside your vehicle. If you are unable to start the vehicle, do the following: 3-button remote Once the vehicle has started, it remains running until you press the button, even if the system does not detect a valid key. If you open and close a door while the vehicle is running, the system searches for a valid key. You cannot restart the vehicle if the system does not detect a valid key within 20 seconds. Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is Stationary Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P. 2. Turn the key to position 0. 3. Apply the parking brake. E145988 5-button remote Vehicles with Keyless Start 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P. 2. Press the button once. 3. Apply the parking brake. Note: This switches off the ignition, all electrical circuits, warning lamps and indicators. E142874 1. Hold the key next to the steering column as shown. 131 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is Moving Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes WARNING WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, including air bags, warning lamps and indicators may also be off. If the ignition was turned off accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and re-start the engine. Important Ventilating Information If you stop your vehicle and leave it idling for long periods, we recommend that you do one of the following: Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 2. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission selector lever to position P and turn the key to position 0. 3. Apply the parking brake. • • Open the windows at least 1 in (2.5 cm). Set your climate control to outside air. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped) WARNINGS Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury. Vehicles with Keyless Start 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 2. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission selector lever to position P. 3. Press and hold the button for one second, or press it three times within two seconds. 4. Apply the parking brake. Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock. Do not fully close the hood, or allow it to drop under its own weight when using the engine block heater. This could damage the power cable and may cause an electrical short resulting in fire, injury and property damage. Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C). 132 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120-volt AC electrical source. • • We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation: • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances. Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors. This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard. • Use as short an extension cord as possible. • Do not use multiple extension cords. • Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire. • Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles. • Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected. • Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes. Using the Engine Block Heater Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary. The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity. AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this automatically shuts down your vehicle if it has been idling for an extended period. The ignition also turns off to save battery power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, your vehicle shuts down. Start your vehicle as normal. Automatic Engine Shutdown Override Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic shutdown. When you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the next ignition cycle. 133 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before starting and driving your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use. Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter. Starting and Stopping the Engine You can stop the shutdown, or reset the timer, at any point before the 30-second countdown has expired by doing any of the following: • Interacting with your vehicle, for example pressing the brake or accelerator pedal. • Disabling the shutdown using the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). • Pressing the OK or RESET button during the 30-second countdown. 134 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unique Driving Characteristics Conditions that may cause the engine to start up or remain running include: • Considerable vehicle acceleration. • Vehicle speed above 85 mph (137 km/h). However, the maximum speed for electric-only operation may be lower while driving in hot temperatures or on hilly terrain. • Ascending a hill. • Charge level of high voltage battery is low. • Very high or low outside temperature (to provide system cooling or heating). For Energi vehicles, climate control demands by passengers may not directly cause the engine to run. This only occurs when the high voltage battery charge is low, or if the outside temperature is cold enough to require the engine to provide additional heat for the cabin. • Engine not warm enough to provide passenger requested cabin temperature. HYBRID VEHICLE OPERATION This hybrid vehicle combines electric and gasoline propulsion to provide breakthrough performance and improved efficiency. Familiarizing yourself with these unique characteristics will provide an optimal driving experience from your new vehicle. Note: You may notice higher engine speeds upon start-up. This temporary condition is normal and necessary to heat up the cabin and minimize emissions. Starting: When you start your vehicle, a green ready indicator light will E144692 appear in the lower right portion of the instrument cluster and a ready to drive message will appear in the middle of the left cluster screen, letting you know that your vehicle is ready for driving. The engine may not start because this vehicle is equipped with silent key start. This fuel saving feature allows your vehicle to be ready–to–drive without requiring the gas engine to be running. This indicator will remain on while your vehicle is on, whether the engine is running or not to indicate your vehicle is capable of movement (using its electric motor, engine, or both). Typically, the engine will not start unless the vehicle is cold, a climate control change is requested, or the accelerator is pressed. Stopping: The gas engine may shut off to conserve fuel as you come to a stop. Restarting your vehicle is not required. Simply step on the accelerator when you are ready to drive. Transmission Operation: Due to the technologically advanced, electronically-controlled continuously variable transaxle, you will not feel shift changes like those of a non-hybrid vehicle. Driving: The gas engine automatically starts and stops to provide power when needed and to save fuel when not needed. While coasting at low speeds, coming to a stop, or standing, the gas engine normally shuts down and your vehicle operates in electric-only mode. Note: Since engine speed is controlled by the transmission, it may seem elevated at times. This is normal hybrid operation and helps deliver fuel efficiency and performance. 135 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unique Driving Characteristics Neutral: In prolonged mountainous driving, you may see the engine speed changing without your input. This is intentional and maintains the battery charge level. You may also notice during extended downhill driving that your engine continues to run instead of shutting off. It is not recommended to idle the vehicle in neutral (N) for an extended period of time because this will discharge your high voltage battery and decrease fuel economy. The engine will not start or stop, and cannot provide power to the hybrid system in neutral (N). During this engine braking, the engine stays on, but it is not using any fuel. You may also hear a slight whine or whistle when operating your vehicle. This is the normal operation of the electric generator in the hybrid system. Low: Low (L) is designed to mimic the enhanced engine braking available in non-hybrid vehicles. Low gear will produce high engine speeds to provide necessary engine braking. This is normal and will not damage your vehicle. In low gear, the gas engine will remain on more often than in drive (D). During certain events (such as vehicle servicing) your low voltage 12-volt battery may become disconnected or disabled. Once the battery is reconnected and after driving the vehicle, the engine may continue to operate for three to five seconds after the key is turned to off. This is a normal condition. Reverse: In reverse (R), vehicle speed is limited to 22 mph (35 km/h). Braking: Battery: Your hybrid is equipped with standard hydraulic braking and regenerative braking. Regenerative braking is performed by your transmission and it captures brake energy and stores it in your high voltage battery. Your hybrid is equipped with a high voltage battery. A cool battery maintains battery life and provides the best possible performance. The high voltage battery is cooled by cabin air drawn from vent holes in the trim panels behind the rear seats. Avoid placing objects at the vent holes that block airflow to the high voltage battery. Driving to Optimize Fuel Economy Note: Having your engine running is not always an indication of inefficiency. In some cases, it is actually more efficient than driving in electric mode. Engine: The engine speed in your hybrid is not directly tied to your vehicle speed. Your vehicle's engine and transmission are designed to deliver the power you need at the most efficient engine speed. During heavy accelerations, your hybrid may reach high engine speeds (up to 6000 RPM). Your fuel economy should improve throughout your hybrid's break-in period. As with any vehicle, your driving habits and accessory usage can significantly impact your fuel economy. For best results, keep in mind these tips: 136 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unique Driving Characteristics • • Keep the tires properly inflated and only use the recommended size. Aggressive driving increases the amount of energy required to move your vehicle. In general, you can achieve better fuel economy with mild to moderate acceleration and deceleration. Moderate braking is particularly important since it allows you to maximize the energy captured by the regenerative braking system. Note: You can switch the EV+ feature on or off through the Driver Assist section of the Settings menu. PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE OPERATION Plug-in Power Mode and Hybrid Mode You must plug in your Energi vehicle regularly for optimal use of the high voltage battery's extended range capability. Charging your vehicle adds electrical energy. This energy is used to propel the vehicle in plug-in power mode. Additional Tips: • Do not carry extra loads. • Be mindful of adding external accessories that may increase aerodynamic drag. • Observe posted speed limits. • Perform all scheduled maintenance. • There is no need to wait for your engine to warm up. The vehicle is ready to drive immediately after starting. Estimated electric range is shown in blue next to gasoline range at the bottom of the right information display. You can also configure MyView to include detailed vehicle range information. See Gauges (page 85). The system maximizes the use of electric-only operation in plug-in power mode. System conditions may require engine operation; however, the system uses plug-in power whenever possible. EV+ Mode Your vehicle will recognize your frequent destinations and allow for more EV driving as you approach them. For example, when nearing your home it should be easier to stay in electric mode. The EV indicator will display EV+ when this mode is active. You should see this approximately 1/8 mile (200 meters) from a frequent destination. See Information Displays (page 93). When your plug-in power is depleted, the powertrain system will automatically switch to hybrid mode. Your battery gauge will transition to a simple battery graphic upon entering hybrid mode. Hybrid mode uses both the gasoline engine and electric motor to power your vehicle and maximize fuel economy. Note: Frequent destinations are learned by your vehicle after two to four weeks of use. To add a destination immediately, perform the following process: cycle the ignition on for 2 seconds, but do not start your vehicle, then off for 2 seconds. Repeat the process 10 times. This location is now programmed for EV+. You can clear these destinations with a Driving History reset through the Settings menu. EV Modes Your vehicle contains selectable EV modes through the EV button E144814 located on the center of the instrument panel, below the climate controls. 137 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unique Driving Characteristics These modes are available when your vehicle can run under high voltage battery power. With your vehicle in driving mode, you can change EV modes with each press of the EV button. The current mode will be displayed in the left-hand instrument cluster screen. 3. Press the EV button. This will change the mode to EV Later and permit engine operation. Your vehicle may automatically enter Engine Enabled mode if system conditions require it. A engine enabled message will display if this occurs. This is normal function, and your vehicle will return to EV Now when possible. Auto EV This mode provides an automatic use of high voltage E155152 battery power during the drive, staying in electric mode when possible and running the engine when needed. This mode will be the only one available if the plug-in power has been depleted. Your vehicle may enter Enable Engine mode if the climate control is in a defrost mode and the outside temperature is cold. A engine enabled message will display if this occurs. If defrost is not needed, select a different climate control mode to permit EV Now. When you enable EV Now, a blue EV icon displays in the left-hand information display. If your vehicle is in the Engine Enabled mode, the EV icon will be yellow. EV Now This mode provides an electric only driving experience. The E144814 left-hand information display changes to a screen displaying your average miles or kilometers per charge along with EV specific tools and functions. EV Now will automatically exit when the Plug in power has been depleted. EV Later This mode saves most of the high voltage battery plug in E151263 power for future use (for example, your initial drive is at high speeds on open roads, but later your drive will be at low speeds in an urban area where plug-in power usage is most efficient). Your vehicle will run the engine as needed and keep most of the high voltage battery plug in power for later use in Auto Mode or EV Now mode. Your vehicle may accelerate more slowly and the top speed may be lower in EV Now mode than in Auto EV mode. You can enable your engine at any time by using one of the following methods: 1. Press the OK button on the left 5–way steering wheel control while viewing the miles or kilometers per charge screen. Your vehicle will enable the engine as needed, and will automatically return to EV Now after eight seconds or when the engine is no longer needed. 2. Press the accelerator pedal fully. A pop up message will appear. Press OK on the left-hand steering wheel button to activate as needed. The message will disappear if you release the accelerator pedal. When you enable EV Later, a white EV Later icon appears on the left-hand information display. The EV Later mode will automatically reset to EV Auto mode when you power your vehicle off. You may press the EV button twice during the next drive to return to EV Later mode, if desired. 138 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unique Driving Characteristics ECO Cruise Note: ECO Cruise is available as a separate feature on Energi vehicles only. On non plug-in vehicles it is included in EcoSelect. Note: If your vehicle is in low engine use mode when you start your vehicle, a message will appear in the information display. See Information Messages (page 101). This feature saves vehicle energy by relaxing acceleration compared to standard cruise control. For example, your vehicle may temporarily lose speed when going uphill. When set to on, ECO appears in the information display when cruise control is on. If you select the EV Now mode while the vehicle is in the low engine use mode, EV Now mode will be suspended for as long as you are in low engine use mode. The low engine use mode will resume the next time you start your vehicle and will automatically stop when no longer needed. You can switch it on or off in through the information display. See General Information (page 93). Note: Cold temperatures will affect the engine warm up time and the low engine use mode may operate more frequently. Note: An oil change is not required but gives you the option of not running a low engine use cycle. Resetting the oil life monitoring system will suspend the low engine use mode. Settings Driver Assist ECO Cruise Low Engine Use Fuel Freshness The low engine use mode is equipped on Energi models only. The Low Engine Use mode maintains proper engine lubrication at sufficient temperature, and will activate automatically when you drive your vehicle with limited engine operation. When your vehicle is in low engine use mode, your vehicle will automatically run the engine as necessary. See Fuel Quality (page 144). 139 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unique Driving Characteristics HYBRID VEHICLE FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Question Answer What are the series of clicks from the cargo The high voltage battery is electrically isolarea when I first turn the key in the ignition? ated from the rest of the vehicle when the key is off. When you switch the key on, high voltage contactors inside the battery are closed to make the electricity available to the motor and generator and enable the vehicle to drive. The clicks are the sound of these contactors as they close and open during start up and shut down. Why does the engine sometimes start at key-on? The vehicle's computer will determine if an engine start is required at key-on. Silent key start will start the engine if it is necessary for cabin heating, windshield defrost, or if the outside temperature is low. (For C-MAX Energi vehicles, the engine may not be required to operate these functions.) Why does it take a long time before the engine shuts down? There are several reasons the engine stays on for an extended amount of time when you first start it. One common reason is to make sure that the emissions components are warm enough to minimize tailpipe emissions. As the climate gets cooler, this engine-on time is extended. Why does my engine never shut down above 85 mph (137 km/h) The engine is required to turn on above this speed to protect the transmission hardware. Why does my engine stay on when it is extremely cold outside? In order to make sure that the climate control system can begin heating the cabin or defrosting the windshield as soon as a driver requests it, the engine coolant temperature has to be kept sufficiently hot. Keeping the engine on is required to maintain the correct coolant temperature. 140 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unique Driving Characteristics Question Answer Why does my engine rev up so high some- Your vehicle's engine and transmission are designed to deliver the power you need at times when I accelerate? the most efficient engine speed. This may be higher than expected during heavy accelerations, and may fluctuate when driving at a steady speed. These are characteristics of the Atkinson engine cycle and the transmission technology that help maximize your hybrid's fuel economy. What is the fan noise I hear from the rear of my hybrid? The fan noise comes from a fan located next to the high voltage battery pack. This fan turns on when the battery requires cooling air. The fan speed, and associated noise level, will change according to the amount of cooling required to maintain good performance. Maintaining the battery temperature at optimal conditions also prolongs the useful life of the battery and helps to achieve better fuel economy. What is the engine oil change service interval? Change the engine oil every 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) or once per year under normal operating conditions. Can I put E15 or E85 in my vehicle, and how will it affect my fuel economy? Your hybrid vehicle can use E15 (15% ethanol, 85% gasoline) fuel, but you may notice slightly reduced fuel economy because ethanol contains less energy per gallon than gasoline. Your hybrid vehicle is not designed to use E85 (85% ethanol). How long will my high voltage battery last? The high voltage battery system is designed to last the life of the vehicle and requires Does it need maintenance? no maintenance. Can you charge the battery with a plug into an A/C outlet? There are no provisions for charging the high voltage battery from a power supply external to the vehicle. (For C-MAX Energi vehicles, the vehicle can be plugged into a 110-volt outlet with charge cord provided.) Can I tow the hybrid behind my motor home with all four wheels down? Yes. Your hybrid vehicle can be flat towed without modification. See Towing (page 190). 141 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unique Driving Characteristics ECOSELECT EcoSelect is a drive mode for non-plugin vehicles designed to offer the best possible fuel economy with only a slight impact to vehicle performance and comfort. To switch EcoSelect on, press the ECO button. E198654 A graphic displays on your information display when EcoSelect is on. Your vehicle will remember the last selected mode whenever you start your vehicle. EcoSelect allows your vehicle to operate more efficiently. You will notice: • Less aggressive heating and cooling. • Softer acceleration. • More regenerative braking. • Changes in engine behavior. • ECO cruise control activation. 142 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNINGS Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel capless fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. • Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. • Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded fuel container. • Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. • Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: • • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle. Always turn off the vehicle before refueling. 143 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction. Fuel and Refueling The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. FUEL QUALITY Choosing the Right Fuel Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. E161513 We recommend regular unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. We do not recommend fuels with an octane rating below 87. Fuel Freshness Mode (If Equipped) This helps keep the fuel system functional and the fuel fresh. If you mainly use your vehicle in electric power mode without refueling, the gasoline in the fuel tank may become stale due to aging. Stale gasoline can damage the engine and fuel system. Do not use any fuel other than those recommended because they could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Your vehicle automatically switches to fuel freshness mode if you do not refuel your vehicle with fresh fuel within an 18-month period. Fuel freshness mode protects your vehicle from potential engine and fuel system damage caused by using stale fuel. Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended can impair the emission control system and cause a loss of vehicle performance. Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol or E85 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. • Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). • Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is prohibited by law). Note: If you do not add new fuel during an 18-month period, fuel freshness mode will use fuel until approximately 1.2 gal (4.5 L) of fuel remains in the fuel tank. During fuel freshness mode: • The information display will indicate fuel freshness mode is active. • The vehicle will only run in hybrid mode. EV Now mode will not be available. • Most of the plug-in power will be stored until fuel freshness mode is completed. Note: EV Now mode resumes when less than 1.2 gal (4.5 L) of fuel remains in the fuel tank. 144 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling Note: When the fuel level is less than one-quarter full, refueling your vehicle will end fuel freshness mode. • • Note: We recommend you use a fuel stabilizer if you use less than a full tank of fuel during an 18-month period. Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION WARNINGS Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel into the fuel system filler neck. This may damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground. The fuel filler funnel is in the under floor storage compartment behind the right-hand front seat. Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others. RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Running out of fuel can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. If your vehicle runs out of fuel: • Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart the engine. If your vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel may be required. • You may need to switch the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. When restarting, cranking time takes a few seconds longer than normal. Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, use the plastic funnel included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page 145). Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they will not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it. Filling a Portable Fuel Container When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, do the following: Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Only use an approved fuel container to transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the container on the ground when filling it. • Do not fill a fuel container when it is inside your vehicle (including the cargo area). 1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages and remove the fuel tank filler cap. Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a fuel tank filler cap. 2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel tank filler pipe opening. 145 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container when filling it. Do not use a device that holds the fuel pump nozzle lever in the fill position. Fuel and Refueling WARNINGS Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle. Keep children away from the fuel pump. Never let children pump fuel. Wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. Stop refueling after the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the second time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing. E157452 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel container. 4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel tank filler pipe opening. 5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and close the fuel tank filler door. 6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back in your vehicle or properly dispose of it. Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from an authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel. Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling. The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System When refueling the vehicle fuel tank, do the following: REFUELING 1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) and switch the ignition off. 2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages. WARNINGS Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries. Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. 146 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling System Warnings If the fuel filler inlet does not close properly or if you do not fully close the fuel filler door, a service engine warning lamp appears in the information display. At the next opportunity, do the following: 1. Safely pull off the road. 2. Put the vehicle in park (P) and switch the ignition off. 3. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages and remove any visible debris from the fuel filler inlet. 4. Insert a fuel filler nozzle or the fuel filler funnel, provided with your vehicle, several times to dislodge any debris and allow the inlet to close properly. 5. Fully close the fuel filler door until it clicks shut. This permits the fuel system to function correctly. E156032 3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system, and leave the nozzle fully inserted until pumping is complete. Hold the handle higher during insertion for easier access. If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and highway driving. Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well. E154765 4. Once pumping is complete, slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle. Allow approximately five to ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle. 5. Fully close the fuel filler door until it clicks shut. This permits the fuel system to function correctly. Note: Do not overfill the fuel tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain hole which is below the fuel filler inlet. Easy Fuel™ Capless System Energi Vehicles Only Your vehicle has an auto-sealing feature that locks the fuel tank refueling valve and the fuel filler door. Before you can refuel your vehicle, you must press the fuel filler door release button on the instrument panel. Pressing the button unlocks the fuel tank refueling valve and opens the fuel filler door. Note: It can take up to fifteen seconds for the fuel filler door to open. 147 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling When refueling the vehicle fuel tank, do the following: 1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) and switch the ignition off. E156032 4. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system and leave the nozzle fully inserted until pumping is complete. Hold the handle higher while inserting for easier access. E145428 2. Press the fuel filler door release button. Wait up to fifteen seconds before opening the fuel filler door. During this time, a message appears in the information display. When the door unlocks a message appears in the information display indicating that your vehicle is ready to be refueled. The vehicle remains ready to refuel for approximately 20 minutes. If more than 20 minutes elapses, you must press the fuel filler door release button again. Note: You may experience the fuel pump turning off if you do not press the fuel filler door release button again. E154765 5. Once pumping is complete, slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle. Allow approximately five to ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle. 6. Fully close the fuel filler door until it clicks shut. This permits the fuel system to function correctly. Note: Do not overfill the fuel tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain hole which is below the fuel filler inlet. 3. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages. 148 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling System Warnings If the fuel filler inlet does not close properly or if you do not fully close the fuel filler door, a service engine warning lamp appears in the information display. At the next opportunity, do the following: 1. Safely pull off the road. 2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) and switch the ignition off. 3. Press the refueling button on the center console. 4. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages and remove any visible debris from the fuel filler inlet. 5. Insert a fuel filler nozzle or the fuel filler funnel, provided with your vehicle, several times to dislodge any debris and allow the inlet to close properly. 6. Fully close the fuel filler door until it clicks shut. This permits the fuel system to function correctly. E162486 2. Remove the panel located in luggage compartment on the right side. If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and highway driving. Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well. E154767 3. Locate the manual fuel filler door release lever. Using the Manual Fuel Filler Door Release Lever The manual fuel filler door release lever is in the luggage compartment on the right side behind a panel. When using the manual fuel filler door release lever to access the fuel filler inlet, do the following: 1. E162484 4. Pull the manual fuel filler door release lever. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) and switch the ignition on. 149 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling Calculating Fuel Economy 5. Switch the ignition off and refuel your vehicle within 20 minutes. If more than 20 minutes is required, fully close the fuel filler door and repeat the procedure. Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles (3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy. FUEL CONSUMPTION Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. 1. 2. 3. Empty reserve is the amount of fuel remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for driving. The usable capacity of the fuel tank is the amount of fuel that can be put into the tank after the gauge indicates empty. The advertised capacity is the total fuel tank size – it is the combined usable capacity plus the empty reserve. 4. 5. Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy. Filling the Tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: • • • Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the engine is left running. Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high) each time the tank is filled. Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARNINGS Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent. 150 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added. After at least three to five tank fill ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading. Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons used (For Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled). Fuel and Refueling An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately. WARNINGS Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal also lists engine displacement. Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter that will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: • Use only the specified fuel listed. • Avoid running out of fuel. • Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. • Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule. Please consult your warranty information for complete details. On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) Your vehicle has a computer known as the on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitors the engine’s emission control system. The system protects the environment by making sure that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists a service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are: If you use anything other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. 1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed properly. See Refueling (page 146). Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. 151 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. 4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet. You can correct these temporary malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time you start the engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city and highway driving. No additional vehicle service is required. If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is ready for I/M testing. If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs. The OBD-II system checks the emission control system during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you can perform the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving: Some state and provincial and local governments may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. 1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by 20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods. 2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight hours with the ignition off. Then, start the vehicle and complete the above driving cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the vehicle until the above driving cycle is complete. If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work, your vehicle may need service. See On-Board Diagnostics. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you need to repeat the above driving cycle. 152 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing High Voltage Battery Your vehicle consists of various high-voltage components and wiring. All of the high-voltage power flows through specific wiring assemblies labeled as such or covered with a solid orange convolute, orange striped tape or both. Do not come in contact with these components. GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Have the battery pack serviced only by an authorized electric vehicle technician. Improper handling can result in personal injury or death. The high-voltage battery system is a high-voltage, lithium-ion battery system. The pack is located in the rear cargo area. The high-voltage battery system uses an air cooled system to regulate the high-voltage battery temperature and help maximize high-voltage battery life. Note: The high-voltage battery does not require regular service maintenance. E163462 Note: The high-voltage battery is equipped with air vents in the package tray that help to regulate its temperature. It is important to keep these openings free of obstructions. Do not block the flow of cabin air to this area. Note: There is a disconnect circuit in your vehicle. Disconnecting the circuit will automatically disable the high-voltage battery. To disable the battery and stop all high-voltage electric activity in the vehicle you can access high-voltage disconnect circuit. To do this, you must unplug the circuit from the circuit port connected to the battery. HIGH-VOLTAGE SERVICE DISCONNECT The high-voltage service disconnect turns off power from the high-voltage battery. 153 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing High Voltage Battery Note: The service disconnect has an outer lever to aid in the proper seating of the service disconnect lever. Remove this to disconnect the high-voltage service disconnect. The high-voltage service disconnect is located behind the rear fold down seats. Service disconnect location for non-Energi vehicles. E171514 3. Pull the outer cover off to expose the service disconnect lever. E163537 Service disconnect location for Energi vehicles. E147234 4. Slide the handle on the service disconnect outboard to the right. For Energi vehicles, slide the handle outboard and to the left. E163538 Disabling the High-Voltage Battery 1. Fold down the rear seats and remove the cover panel. 2. Locate the access door and remove the plastic cover. E146133 154 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing High Voltage Battery Charging Equipment 5. Pull the handle toward you and remove the service disconnect from the vehicle to disable the high-voltage battery. Reactivating the High-Voltage Battery Note: If you have manually disconnected your high-voltage shut off circuit, you will need to reconnect the circuit before you can reactivate it. The system will detect if the electrical system is safe and turn on automatically. CHARGING THE HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY WARNINGS Do not use the 120 volt convenience cord with an extension cord, two-prong adapter, surge protector, timer or other adapter. E78097 Your vehicle is equipped with a standard 120 volt convenience cord located in the floor compartment behind the driver seat. In Canada, do not use the 120 volt convenience cord in commercial garages. Note: The 120 volt convenience cord allows you to charge the high voltage battery using a standard 120 volt household outlet. It takes approximately seven hours to completely charge an empty battery using the standard 120 volt convenience cord. This equipment has arcing or sparking parts, do not expose to flammable vapors. Position this equipment at least 18 in (45 cm) above the floor. We recommend upgrading to the optional 240 volt charging station for faster more efficient charging. It takes approximately 2.5 hours to completely charge an empty battery using a 240 volt charging station. The AC wall plug must fit firmly into the AC outlet. If the connection feels loose, worn or the AC outlet is damaged, please have a qualified electrician replace the AC outlet. Using a convenience cord with a worn outlet may cause burns, property damage and increase the risk of electric shock. Your electrical source must meet certain requirements for the high voltage batteries to charge: • The AC outlet must be a three-prong 110-120 volt AC outlet that is properly grounded, 15–20 amps (or greater), and in good condition. • You must use a dedicated line, which means you cannot have other appliances connected to the same circuit. 155 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing High Voltage Battery Note: If you do not have a dedicated circuit, contact a licensed professional electrician for proper installation. 120 Volt Convenience Cord Make sure that the 120 volt convenience cord is completely unwound before charging. Always plug the cord into the AC outlet before connecting the charging coupler into the charge port on your vehicle. A B C D E197446 A. Power. B. Check outlet. C. Fault. D. Vehicle. Note: When the convenience cord is plugged into an outlet, use the following table to determine your vehicle charge status. If the POWER indicator light is off after plugging in the convenience cord, use a different outlet. 156 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing High Voltage Battery Convenience Cord LED Indicators Status Check Outlet Fault Vehicle Off Off Off The convenience cord is not connected to your vehicle. Off Off On The convenience cord is connected, but your vehicle is not charging. Off Off Blink Your vehicle is charging. Off Blink Off Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Fault Detected. The convenience cord is retrying to charge. Off On Off Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Fault Detected. The convenience cord has exhausted its retry attempts. Your vehicle is not charging, or there is an internal fault in the charging equipment. Blink Off Off The convenience cord detected a high temperature at the AC plug and is waiting for the AC plug to return to a normal operating temperature.* Blink Off On The convenience cord detected a high temperature at the AC plug. The AC plug has returned to a normal operating temperature. Your vehicle is ready to charge at a reduced current.* Blink Off Blink The convenience cord detected a high temperature at the AC plug. The AC plug has returned to a normal operating temperature. Your vehicle is charging at a reduced current.* Blink On Off The convenience cord detected a high temperature at the AC plug. Your vehicle is not charging. The convenience cord has exhausted its retry attempts.* *Have the outlet checked by a qualified electrician and make sure the AC plug fits firmly into the outlet. Contact an authorized EV certified dealer if problem persists. 157 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing High Voltage Battery Charge Port The cord acknowledgment feature activates when you initiate a charge cycle. The four light quadrants each individually flash in a clockwise motion, starting with the top right-hand side light and ending with the top left-hand side, two times confirming that the system detects the charging coupler. The charge port is located between the front left-hand side door and the front left-hand side wheel well. Press the indentation on the charge port door to open and close it. Charging Note: Your vehicle must be in park (P) to charge. To charge your high voltage battery: 1. Put your vehicle in park (P) and switch off your vehicle. 2. Press the indentation on the charge port door to open it. 3. Plug the charging coupler into the charge port on your vehicle. Make sure the button clicks confirming you have completely engaged the coupler. E144779 Note: Do not force the charge port door open or closed. Forcing the door open or closed damages the charge port. You can modify the light ring illumination settings. The light ring located around the charge port indicates the charge status of the high voltage battery in your vehicle. Divided into four quadrants, the charge port light ring displays the state of charge in 25 percent increments. You can press the unlock button on your key fob to view the charge status of your vehicle. Based on which quadrants light, you can determine the current state of charge. If the charge is below 25 percent, the light ring does not light. Do not forget to press the lock button on your key fob to re-lock your vehicle. E144780 4. Verify that the cord acknowledgment feature activates. The cord acknowledgment feature activates when you initiate a charge cycle. 5. If using a 240 volt charging station, follow the instructions on the charge station to begin the charging process. The light ring also displays the current state of charge when opening the doors. 158 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing High Voltage Battery Waiting to Charge The light ring located around the charge port indicates the charge status of the high voltage battery in your vehicle: • When the top right-hand side quadrant is pulsing, the charge is between 0-25 percent. • When the top right-hand side quadrant is on and the bottom right-hand quadrant is pulsing, the charge is between 25-50 percent. • When both right-hand side quadrants are on and the bottom left-hand side quadrant is pulsing, the charge is between 50-75 percent. • When three quadrants are on and the top left-hand side quadrant is pulsing, the charge is between 75-100 percent. • When all the lights on the light ring are on, the charge is complete. When you select Value Charge, charging may not begin upon plugging in. The vehicle may delay charging to take advantage of off-peak electricity rates. The vehicle will optimize the charge schedule to be complete by the next GO Time. When waiting to charge (not actively charging), the light ring will indicate the present state of charge of the high voltage battery as follows: • When the top right quadrant light is off, the charge is between 0–25 percent. • When the top right quadrant light is on and the bottom right quadrant is off, the charge is between 25–50 percent. • When both right side quadrant lights are on and the bottom left quadrant is off, the charge is between 50–75 percent. • When three quadrant lights are on and the top left quadrant is off, the charge is between 75–100 percent. • When all lights on the entire ring are on, the charge is 100 percent. Note: The light ring will turn off one minute after reaching a full charge. Locking the Charging Coupler Note: To lock the charging coupler, you need a padlock or a combination lock with a shackle diameter of 0.2 in (5 mm) or less. Also, the straight portion of the shackle must be 1.0 in (25.4 mm) or longer. Note: When the vehicle is waiting to charge, the light ring will turn off one minute after displaying the present state of charge. When the vehicle automatically begins charging, the light ring will turn on and display how far along the charge is per the section above. Note: If the system detects a vehicle charging system fault at any point in a charge cycle, the entire light ring will flash continuously for one minute and then turn off. If this happens, unplug the charging coupler and then plug it back into the charge port receptacle. If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. E172036 You can modify the light ring lighting conditions by using the touchscreen system. 1. Insert the lock through the hole in the charging coupler button. 2. Lock the padlock or combination lock. 159 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing High Voltage Battery Disconnecting the Charging Coupler 3. If your vehicle is not powered after this sequence, repeat steps 1 and 2 up to two more times. Note: Do not pull the wall plug from the wall while the vehicle is charging. Doing so may damage the outlet and the cord. For vehicles equipped with a push button start system: Press the START/STOP button to turn ignition off. 2. Press the brake pedal and press the START/STOP button. 3. If your vehicle is not powered after this sequence, repeat steps 1 and 2 up to two more times. Note: During this process, your vehicle will detect if the electrical system is safe and reactivate. Once your vehicle determines the electrical system safe, you can start your vehicle as you would normally by either turning the ignition key or by pressing the brake in combination with the START/STOP button. 1. 1. Remove the lock from the charging coupler button. 2. Press the button on the charging coupler. 3. While holding the button, remove the charging coupler from the charge port receptacle on your vehicle. Note: In the event your vehicle does not reactivate after the third key cycle, contact an authorized dealer. E144781 4. Close the charge port door by pressing the indentation on the charge port door. Continue pressing the indentation while the door rotates counterclockwise and closes. HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY CUTOFF SWITCH The high-voltage shut off operation shuts off power from the high-voltage battery after a collision, or if your vehicle receives a substantial physical jolt. To reactivate your vehicle after either event, perform the following steps: 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Turn the ignition on. 160 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Transmission Park (P) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning. Come to a complete stop before putting your vehicle into and out of park (P). WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in park (P). Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. Reverse (R) With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your vehicle will move backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of reverse (R). Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously. Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than three seconds will limit engine rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury. Neutral (N) With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position. Note: Do not leave your vehicle with the transmission in neutral (N). Leaving your vehicle with the transmission in neutral (N) will drain the battery and you may not be able to start your vehicle. Drive (D) Drive (D) is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Automatic Transmission Low (L) Putting your vehicle in gear: • • 1. Fully press down the brake pedal. 2. Move the gearshift lever to the desired gear. 3. Come to a complete stop. 4. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in park (P). • Provides maximum engine braking. The transmission may be shifted into low (L) at any vehicle speed. Is not intended for use under extended or normal driving conditions and results in lower fuel economy. Grade assist: Press the transmission control switch on the side of the gearshift lever to activate grade assist. E144820 161 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Transmission WARNINGS When doing this procedure, you will be taking your vehicle out of park which means your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate. If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your authorized dealer. E146092 • • • Provides additional grade braking with a combination of engine motoring and high-voltage battery charging to help maintain vehicle speed when descending a grade. As your vehicle determines the amount of engine motoring and high-voltage battery charging, you may notice the engine speed increasing and decreasing to help maintain your vehicle speed when descending a grade. The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated. E144523 Note: See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used. Note: For some markets this feature will be disabled. Use the brake shift interlock lever to move the gearshift lever from the park position in the event of an electrical malfunction or if your vehicle has a dead battery. Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition off before performing this procedure. The grade assist lamp will appear in the instrument cluster when grade assist is turned on. Press the transmission control switch again to return to normal drive (D). Brake-Shift Interlock WARNINGS Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working. 162 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Transmission Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. E162619 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the side panel on the right side of the gearshift lever. Locate the access hole. Insert the screwdriver (or similar tool) into the access hole and press the lever foreword while pulling the gearshift lever out of the park (P) position and into the neutral (N) position. Remove the tool and reinstall the panel. Start your vehicle and release the parking brake. If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. 163 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Brakes Anti-lock Brake System GENERAL INFORMATION This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking. Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, have it checked by an authorized dealer. This lamp momentarily illuminates when you turn the ignition on. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the system may be disabled. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still effective. Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels (page 245). If the brake warning lamp illuminates when you release the E144522 parking brake, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 89). E144522 Regenerative Braking System Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes. This feature is used to simulate the engine braking of an internal combustion engine and assist the standard brake system while recovering some of the energy of motion and storing it in the battery to improve the range of your vehicle. The standard brake system is designed to fully stop the car if regenerative braking is not available. During regenerative braking, the motor is spun as a generator to create electrical current. This recharges the battery and slows the vehicle. In effect, once the accelerator pedal is released, the motor changes from an energy user to an energy producer. Brake Over Accelerator In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move the transmission to park (P), switch the engine off and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for any interference. If none are found and the condition persists, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer. When the accelerator pedal is released or the brake pedal is applied, the brake controller automatically detects the amount of deceleration requested and optimizes how much of the deceleration will be produced by regenerative braking. The remaining portion is generated by Brake Assist Brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal. Brake assist can reduce stopping distances in critical situations. 164 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Brakes 1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly. 2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its fullest extent. Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing uphill, shift the gearshift lever to park (P) and turn the steering wheel away from the curb. standard friction braking. When the battery is almost fully charged, the amount of regenerative braking is limited to avoid overcharging, and the requested deceleration is produced by standard friction braking alone. Regenerative braking does not take the place of the standard friction brakes; it only assists them. Regenerative braking has also been designed to interact with the anti-lock brake system. Regenerative braking is disabled when the anti-lock brake system is activated or the battery is fully charged. Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing downhill, shift the gearshift lever to park (P) and turn the steering wheel toward the curb. To release the parking brake: 1. Press the brake pedal firmly. 2. Pull the lever up slightly. 3. Press the release button and push the lever down. HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Note: When the system is operating, the brake pedal may pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal. HILL START ASSIST WARNINGS The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into park (P) (automatic transmission) or first gear (1) (manual transmission). The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when: • You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you. • Your vehicle is hydroplaning. • You take corners too fast. • The road surface is poor. You must remain in your vehicle once you have activated the system. During all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. PARKING BRAKE WARNING If the engine is revved excessively, or if a malfunction is detected, the system will be deactivated. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure you shift the gearshift lever to park (P). Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. Note: Do not press the release button while pulling the lever up. To apply the parking brake: 165 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Brakes Switching the System On and Off When the system is active, your vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal. This allows you time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The brakes release automatically when the engine has sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the grade. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space. You can switch this feature on or off if your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission and an information display. See General Information (page 93). The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. If your vehicle is not equipped with a manual transmission and an information display, you cannot turn the system on or off. When you switch the ignition on, the system automatically turns on. The system will activate automatically on any slope that will cause significant vehicle rollback. For vehicles with a manual transmission, you can switch this feature off using the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). The system will remain on or off depending on how it was last set. Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate the system is either on or off. Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available while Auto Hold is active. Using Hill Start Assist 1. Bring your vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the brake pedal pressed and select an uphill gear (for example, first (1) when facing uphill or reverse (R) when facing downhill). 2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is on a slope, the system will activate automatically. 3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, your vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for about two or three seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the process of driving off. 4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will release automatically. 166 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Traction Control Using the Information Display Controls PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. You can switch this feature off or on in the information display. See General Information (page 93). If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction. Using a Switch (If Equipped) Use the traction control switch on the instrument panel to switch the system off or on. The switch illuminates when traction control is off. USING TRACTION CONTROL System Indicator Lights and Messages WARNING The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily if the system detects a failure. Make sure you did not manually disable the traction control system using the information display controls or the switch. If the stability control and traction control light is still illuminating steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with the traction control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. The stability and traction control light: E138639 • • • The stability and traction control off light temporarily illuminates on engine start-up and stays on when you switch the traction control system off. The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, switching traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin. Note: When you switch traction control off, stability control remains fully active. Switching the System Off When you switch the system off or on, a message appears in the information display showing system status. You can switch the system off by either using the information display controls or the switch. 167 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Temporarily illuminates on engine start-up. Flashes when a driving condition activates either of the systems. Illuminates if a problem occurs in either of the systems. Stability Control If a driving condition activates either the stability control or the traction control system you may experience the following conditions: PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the electronic stability control system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the electronic stability control system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the electronic stability control sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the electronic stability control system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. • • • • • • The stability control system has several features built into it to help you maintain control of your vehicle: Electronic Stability Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine power. Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage. Activation of the electronic stability control system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your electronic stability control system activates, SLOW DOWN. Roll Stability Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent rollovers by detecting your vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually. Traction Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to maintain traction of the wheels by detecting and controlling wheel spin. See Using Traction Control (page 167). The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. 168 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing The stability and traction control light flashes. Your vehicle slows down. Reduced engine power. A vibration in the brake pedal. The brake pedal is stiffer than usual. If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. Stability Control B B B A A B A E72903 A Vehicle without stability control skidding off its intended route. B Vehicle with stability control maintaining control on a slippery surface. USING STABILITY CONTROL The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. You cannot switch the stability control system off, but when you shift into reverse (R), the system deactivates. You can switch the traction control system off or on. See Using Traction Control (page 167). 169 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids Note: The sensing system cannot be turned off when a MyKey is present. See Principle of Operation (page 51). PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the limitations of the system as contained in this section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed) objects when moving on a flat surface at parking speeds. Certain objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's parking aid systems, traffic control systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and external motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation. Note: If you attach certain add-on devices such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing system may detect that add-on device and therefore provide warnings. It is suggested that you disable the rear sensing system when you attach an add-on device to your vehicle to prevent these warnings. The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of your vehicle. The system turns on automatically whenever you switch the ignition on. The system can be switched off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you shift the transmission into reverse (R). See General Information (page 93). To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system. If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information display. See Information Messages (page 101). This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging your vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to the ground. REAR PARKING AID The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning increases. When the obstacle is less than 10 in (25 cm) away, the warning sounds continuously. If the system detects a stationary or receding object farther than 10 in (25 cm) from the corners of the bumper, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again. Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the system, may create false beeps. Note: Keep the sensors, located on the bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. 170 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids E187330 Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from the front bumper. There is decreased coverage area at the outer corners. E130178 Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumper. There may be decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. The system sounds an audible warning when obstacles are near either bumper in the following manner: • Objects detected by the front sensors are indicated by a high-pitched tone from the front of the vehicle. • Objects detected by the rear sensors are indicated by a lower pitched tone from the rear of the vehicle. • The sensing system reports the obstacle which is closest to the front or rear of the vehicle. For example, if an obstacle is 12 in (30 cm) from the front of the vehicle and, at the same time, an obstacle is only 6 in (15 cm) from the rear of the vehicle, the lower pitched tone sounds. • An alternating warning sounds from the front and rear if there are objects at both bumpers that are closer than 10 in (25 cm). The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in reverse (R) : • Your vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h). FRONT PARKING AID The front sensors are active when the transmission is in any position other than park (P) and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h). 171 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids The system should not be used if: • a foreign object (i.e. bike rack or trailer) is attached to the front or rear of the vehicle or at another location close to the sensors. • an overhanging object (i.e. surfboard) is attached to the roof. • the front bumper, rear bumper or side sensors are damaged (i.e. in a collision) or obstructed by a foreign object (i.e. front bumper cover). • a mini-spare tire is in use. ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped) WARNING This system is designed to be a supplementary park aid. It may not work in all conditions and is not intended to replace the driver’s attention and judgment. The driver is responsible for avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe distance and speed, even when the system is in use. Note: The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if required. Using Active Park Assist The system detects an available parallel parking space and automatically steers the vehicle into the space (hands-free) while you control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly instructs you to park the vehicle. The system may not function correctly if something passes between the front bumper and the parking space (i.e. a pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high from the ground (i.e. a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck). E142733 Press the button. The touch screen displays a message and a corresponding graphic to indicate it's searching for a parking space. Use the turn signal to indicate which side of the vehicle you want the system to search on. Note: The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections. Note: The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves. Note: If the turn signal is not on, the system automatically searches on the vehicle's passenger side. Note: After a tire change the system will go through a relearning procedure. During this time the system performance may deteriorate. Note: You can also activate the Active Park Assist system after you have already driven partially or completely past a parking space. To do so, press the Active Park button and the system will inform you if you have recently passed a suitable parking space. 172 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids A E130107 Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the touch screen shows a message to alert you to reduce vehicle speed. When a suitable space is found, the touch screen displays a message and a chime sounds. Slow down and stop at approximately position (A), then follow the instructions on the touch screen. Automatic Steering into Parking Space Note: You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all times in the maneuver. Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the system switches off and you need to take full control of the vehicle. Note: Vehicles with overhanging loads (for example, a bus or a truck), street furniture and other items may not be detected by active park assist. You must make sure the selected space is suitable for parking. Note: If a maneuver is interrupted before completion, the system switches off. The steering wheel position will not indicate the actual position of the steering and you have to full take control of the vehicle. Note: The vehicle should be driven as parallel to other vehicles as possible while passing a parking space. When you shift the transmission into reverse (R), with your hands off the wheel (and nothing obstructing its movement), your vehicle steers itself into the space. The system displays instructions to move your vehicle back and forth in the space. Note: The system always offers the last detected parking space (i.e. if the vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are driving, it offers the last one). E130108 173 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids When you think the vehicle is properly parked, or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid, bring the vehicle to a complete stop. E130109 • When automatic steering is finished, the touch screen displays a message indicating that the active park assist process is done and a tone sounds. The driver is responsible for checking the parking job and making any necessary corrections before putting the transmission in P (Park). • driving above 6 mph (10 km/h) during automatic steering. turning off the traction control system. Certain vehicle conditions can also deactivate the system, such as: • Traction control has activated on a slippery or loose surface. • There is an anti-lock brake system activation or failure. • Something touches the steering wheel. Deactivating the Park Assist Feature The system can be deactivated manually by: • pressing the active park assist button. • grabbing the steering wheel during automatic steering. • driving above approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an active park search. If a problem occurs with the system, a warning message is displayed, followed by a chime. Occasional system messages may occur in normal operation. For recurring or frequent system faults, contact an authorized dealer to have your vehicle serviced. Troubleshooting the System The system does not look for a space The traction control system may be off. The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space. 174 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids The system does not offer a particular space The sensors may be covered (for example snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered sensors can affect the system's functionality. There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space. The vehicle is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) from the parking space. The vehicle is closer than 16 in (40 cm) from the parking space. Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h). The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space. The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (i.e. rolling forward when reverse [R] is selected). An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle properly. Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly. The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space. The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (i.e. not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes). A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities. A parked vehicle has a high attachment (i.e. salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed, etc.). The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed. The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (i.e. driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash). You didn't wait for the steering wheel to complete its rotation after a gear change. The system performs best when the steering wheel is allowed to finish before accelerating. 175 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped) WARNINGS The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. E162528 The camera is located on the liftgate. Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop your vehicle. Using the Rear View Camera System The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in reverse (R). Use caution when using the rear video camera and the liftgate is ajar. If the liftgate is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines have been removed when the liftgate is ajar. The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle: • Active guidelines: Show the intended path of your vehicle when reversing. • Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path your vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line. This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning your vehicle with another object behind you. • Centerline: Helps align the center of your vehicle with an object (for example, a trailer). Use caution when turning camera features on or off while in reverse (R). Make sure your vehicle is not moving. The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle. During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind your vehicle. Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and the luggage compartment is ajar, no rear view camera features are displayed. Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in reverse (R), have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. 176 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind your vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow connector is engaged. A B C D E Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions: • • • Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating. The camera's view is obstructed by mud, water or debris. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner. The rear of your vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to become misaligned. To access any of the rear view camera system settings, make the following selections in the display screen when the transmission is not in reverse (R): • Menu > Vehicle > Rear View Camera F E142436 After changing a system setting, the display screen shows a preview of the selected features. A Active guidelines B Centerline Camera Guidelines C Fixed guideline: Green zone Note: Dynamic guidelines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone E Fixed guideline: Red zone F Rear bumper Active guidelines are only shown with fixed guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path. If the steering wheel position is changed while reversing, your vehicle might deviate from the original intended path. 177 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind your vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in reverse (R). When the transmission is shifted out of reverse (R), the feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again. The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guidelines are not shown when the steering wheel position is straight. Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of your vehicle. Selectable settings for this feature are + and -. The default setting for the manual zoom is OFF. Rear Camera Delay (If Equipped) When you shift the transmission out of reverse (R) and into any gear while the rear camera delay is active, the camera image displays until: Enhanced Park Aids Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 7 mph (12 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. • When the sensing system detects an object, it displays red, yellow and green highlights at the top of the image. The alert highlights all objects detected. • Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF. Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. Manual Zoom WARNING When manual zoom is on, the full area behind your vehicle is not shown. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature. Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). Note: When manual zoom is enabled, only the centerline is shown. 178 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Your vehicle speed sufficiently increases. You shift your vehicle into park (P). Cruise Control Switching Cruise Control On PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Press and release ON. Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. You can use cruise control when your vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h). The indicator appears in the instrument cluster. E71340 Note: Using cruise control with ECO Cruise switched on may change the operation of the system. This feature saves vehicle energy by relaxing acceleration compared to standard cruise control. For example, your vehicle may temporarily lose speed when going uphill. USING CRUISE CONTROL WARNINGS Do not use cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Energi vehicles: ECO Cruise can be turned on or off through the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). Hybrid vehicles: ECO Cruise is included in EcoSelect which is turned on or off using the ECO button on the center console. When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the brakes but a warning displays. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. For additional information, refer to ECO Cruise and EcoSelect. See Unique Driving Characteristics (page 135). Note: When you are going downhill while using cruise control, the battery charging system and engine work together to help maintain your set speed. Engine noise may increase or decrease under these conditions. Note: Cruise control will disengage if the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set speed while driving uphill. Setting the Cruise Speed 1. Drive to desired speed. 2. Press and release SET+ or SET-. 3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. E142437 The cruise controls are on the steering wheel. 179 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Cruise Control Changing the Set Speed • • • Press and release SET+ or SET-. When you select km/h as the display measurement in the information display the set speed changes in approximately 2 km/h increments. When you select mph as the display measurement in the information display the set speed changes in approximately 1 mph increments. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press and release SET+. Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release the control when you reach the desired speed. Canceling the Set Speed Pull and release CAN toward you or tap the brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. Resuming the Set Speed Pull and release RES toward you. Switching Cruise Control Off Press and release OFF when the system is in stand by mode or switch the ignition off. Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off. 180 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids Steering Tips STEERING If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: • Correct tire pressures. • Uneven tire wear. • Loose or worn suspension components. • Loose or worn steering components. • Improper vehicle alignment. Electric Power Steering WARNINGS The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a message displays in the information display. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the ignition on and watch the information display for a steering system warning message. If a steering system warning message returns, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Note: A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander or pull. Adaptive Learning The electronic power steering system adaptive learning helps correct road irregularities and improves overall handling and steering feel. It communicates with the brake system to help operate advanced stability control and accident avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, you must drive your vehicle a short distance before the system relearns the strategy and reactivates all systems. If the system detects an error, you may not feel a difference in the steering, however a serious condition may exist. Obtain immediate service from an authorized dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of steering control. Your vehicle has an electric power steering system. There is no fluid reservoir. No maintenance is required. If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving, electric power steering assistance is lost. The steering system still operates and you can steer your vehicle manually. Manually steering your vehicle requires more effort. Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort required for you to steer your vehicle. This increased effort prevents overheating and permanent damage to the steering system. You do not lose the ability to steer your vehicle manually. Typical steering and driving maneuvers allow the system to cool and return to normal operation. 181 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE E164183 Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the mounting features located behind the rear seat on the rear trim panels to install the cargo shade. E162198 The under floor storage compartments are located behind the front seats. Lift the handle to unlatch the lid. To operate the cargo shade: 1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade rearward. 2. Secure both ends of the support rod into the retention slots located on the rear quarter trim panels. LUGGAGE COVERS WARNINGS Make sure that the posts are properly latched in mounting features. The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or accident if it is not securely installed. Removing the Shade Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade. They may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash. Use the cargo shade to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle. E162195 Press the release lever on each side forward, and then lift the shade out of the mounting feature. You will see a red mark when the lever is unlatched. 182 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label: Base Curb Weight - is the weight of the vehicle including full fluids and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment. Vehicle Curb Weight - is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment. LOAD LIMIT Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, trailer or both, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with PAYLOAD E143816 payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If you install any aftermarket or authorized-dealer installed equipment on the vehicle, you must subtract the weight of the equipment from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload. Payload - is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door (vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum 183 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying Example only: WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover. E210944 E210945 CARGO E143817 184 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying Cargo Weight - includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight. GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) including vehicle curb weight and all payload. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position. The total load on each axle must never exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating. Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer. GVW E143818 Safety Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position. The Gross Vehicle Weight must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo, plus passengers. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). It is shown on the 185 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying Example only: E198828 WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury. GCW GVW E143819 186 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight - refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch. Examples: For a 5000 pound (2268 kilogram) conventional trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 pounds (227 to 340 kilograms). For an 11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds (782 to 1304 kilograms). GCW (Gross Combined Weight) - is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer, including all cargo and passengers, that the vehicle can handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight Rating.) Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the Gross Combined Weight of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The Gross Combined Weight must never exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating. Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight - is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with mandatory options, driver and front passenger weight (150 pounds [68 kilograms] each), no cargo weight (internal or external) and a tongue load of 10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer). Consult an authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer) for more detailed information. WARNINGS Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury. Steps for determining the correct load limit: 187 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb." on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity: *Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms. *Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past two years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for twelve 100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms), the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would 188 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement bags, then the load calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms. The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position. 189 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Towing We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means. TOWING A TRAILER WARNING Your vehicle is not approved for trailer towing. Never tow a trailer with your vehicle. Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE The front wheels (drive wheels) must be on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission. We recommend placing the rear wheels on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the front using wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage to the rear fascia. TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Emergency Towing WARNING If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position when being towed. If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration) under the following conditions: • Tow only in the forward direction. • The transmission in position N. If you cannot move the transmission into N, you may need to override it. See Automatic Transmission (page 161). E143886 If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. 190 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Towing • • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers). Vehicles with Ignition Key 1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal, and then turning the ignition key until the vehicle starts. 2. Press the brake pedal and shift the transmission into position N. 3. Turn the vehicle off by turning the ignition key past the accessory position. The key position is between the accessory and off positions. See Ignition Switch (page 129). (Trip Summary appears in the left instrument cluster screen when the vehicle is off.) Note: If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition key, you cannot remove the key from the ignition cylinder when the transmission is in position N and the vehicle is off. Recreational Towing Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. See Climate Control (page 108). Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission. You can tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly. If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider. All Vehicles • • If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground: • Tow only in the forward direction. • Release the parking brake. Vehicles with Push Button Start 1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal, and then pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button until the vehicle starts. 2. Press the brake pedal and shift the transmission into position N. 3. Turn the vehicle off by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. (Trip Summary appears in the left instrument cluster screen when the vehicle is off.) Note: You can remove the key fob from the vehicle while towing. Note: A SHIFT TO PARK or TRANSMISSION NOT IN PARK message may appear in the information display when the transmission is in position N and the ignition is in the off position. 191 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). Place the transmission in position P, start the vehicle, and allow the engine to run for one minute at the beginning of each day (you may need to press the accelerator pedal in order to start the engine). After allowing the vehicle to run, place the transmission back into position N and the ignition in the off position. Driving Hints • BREAKING-IN You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics. The engine also needs to break in. Avoid hard accelerations and driving too fast for the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers). If possible, avoid carrying heavy loads up steep grades during the break-in period. • • ECONOMICAL DRIVING • Your fuel economy depends on: • How you drive your vehicle. • How you maintain your vehicle. • The conditions you drive your vehicle in. • You may improve your fuel economy by keeping these in mind: • Drive your vehicle at reasonable speeds. Traveling at 65 mph (105 km/h) uses about 15% less fuel than traveling at 75 mph (121 km/h). • Drive at steady speeds without stopping. • Anticipate stops. Slowing down your vehicle may eliminate the need to stop. • Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size. • Switch off the heater if you do not need it. When you have the heater on, keep it at the lowest blower and temperature setting necessary to be comfortable. • When it is cold outside, park in a sunny location or a climate-controlled environment. This may save fuel by reducing the energy needed to heat the cabin. • • • • • • 192 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Switch off the air conditioning if you do not need it. When you have the air conditioning on, keep it at the lowest blower and highest temperature setting necessary to be comfortable. When it is hot or sunny outside, parking in a shaded or climate-controlled environment will save fuel by reducing the energy needed to cool the cabin. For the C-MAX Energi, use preconditioning to improve your fuel economy. See High Voltage Battery (page 153). Switch off the heated seats if you are not using them. Switch off the defroster when you no longer need it for visibility. For the C-MAX Energi, plug in and recharge the high voltage battery whenever possible. Use ECO Cruise Control, especially in hilly terrain. For information on enabling eco-cruise, See Cruise Control (page 179). Shift into low gear (L) when enhanced engine braking is needed. Otherwise, use drive gear (D) shift position. Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. A warmed up engine works more efficiently. When running errands, go to the farthest destination first and then work your way back home. Close the windows for high-speed driving. Use the recommended engine oil. See Capacities and Specifications (page 276). Driving Hints • • Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 348). Use the coach and brake coach display to get feedback on your economical drive style. For more information, See Information Displays (page 93). DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you may lose control of your vehicle. Avoid these actions because they reduce your fuel economy: • Avoid sudden or hard accelerations and decelerations. Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion. • Avoid revving the engine before switching off your vehicle. • Avoid long idle periods. • Do not warm up your vehicle on cold mornings. • Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. • Avoid carrying unnecessary weight. Approximately 1 mile per gallon (0.4 kilometers per liter) is lost for every 400 lb (180 kg) of weight carried. • Avoid adding accessories that increase aerodynamic drag to your vehicle such as bug deflectors, car top carriers and ski or bike racks. • Avoid driving with the wheels out of alignment. Note: Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage. Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. Before driving through standing water, check the depth. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the front rocker area of your vehicle. E176360 When driving through standing water, drive very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your brake performance and traction may be limited. After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so: Things to keep in mind when you refuel your vehicle: • Fuel generates fewer vapors when it is cool and dark outside. Refuel your vehicle in the early morning or late evening. • Use the recommended octane-rated fuel. Using fuel below the recommended rating will lower your fuel economy. • • • • 193 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the brakes and to check that they work. Check that the horn works. Check that the exterior lights work. Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works. Driving Hints FLOOR MATS WARNINGS Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control. WARNINGS Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation causing a loss of vehicle control. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to make sure mats do not shift out of position. Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. E142666 To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the retention post and press down to lock in. To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation. Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning or replacement. 194 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies authorized dealer. If a member requests a tow to an authorized dealer that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from the disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km). ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: • • Roadside Assistance includes up to $200 for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services. 24 hours a day, seven days a week. For the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner's Manual portfolio. Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance covers: • A flat tire change with a good spare, if provided with the vehicle (except vehicles supplied with a tire inflation kit). • Battery jump start. • Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer's responsibility). • Fuel delivery — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery service to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period. • Winch out — available within 100 ft (30.5 m) of a paved or county maintained road, no recoveries. • Towing — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall tow Ford eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer within 35 mi (56 km) of the disablement location or to the nearest Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. This card is in the owner's information portfolio in the glove compartment. United States Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company reimburses a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement information, United States Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers need to submit their original receipts. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is eligible within Canada or the continental United States. 195 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage is concurrent with the powertrain coverage period of your vehicle. FUEL SHUTOFF WARNING Failure to inspect and, if necessary, repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury. Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision. Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1-800-665-2006. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle has a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off. In Canada, this card is found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment of your vehicle. Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your vehicle. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance Program Coverage For vehicles equipped with a key system: The service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. For complete program coverage details you may contact your dealer, you can call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at www.ford.ca. 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Check the information display for the Ready to Drive light as the gasoline engine may not start, but the electric motor may be running. If you do not see the Ready to Drive light, repeat Steps 1 and 2 up to two more times. HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS For vehicles equipped with a push button start system: Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage. 1. Press the push button start to switch off the ignition. 2. Press the brake pedal and press the push button start to switch on the ignition. 3. Check the information display for the Ready to Drive light as the gasoline engine may not start, but the electric motor may be running. If you do not see the Ready to Drive light, repeat Steps 1 and 2 up to two more times. Note: If used when the vehicle is not running, the battery will lose charge. There may be insufficient power to restart your vehicle. The hazard warning button is located on the instrument panel. Use it when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. • • Press the button to turn on the hazard warning function, and the front and rear direction indicators will flash. Press the button again to turn them off. 196 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies Note: When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure that the electrical system is safe to restart. Once your vehicle determines that the electrical system is safe, then the vehicle will allow you to restart. 3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges. Turn all other accessories off. Connecting the Jumper Cables Your vehicle has a 12-volt battery that has two prongs accessible from under the hood. Your vehicle can be jumped the same way conventional vehicles can by using these prongs. The illustration below shows the two connector prongs used for jump-starting your vehicle. Note: In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third attempt, contact an authorized dealer. JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNINGS The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if contacted. Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage. E192363 A. Positive prong (+) B. Negative prong (-) Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. Preparing Your Vehicle Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your vehicle. Note: Remove the red cap from the positive prong (A) on your vehicle before connecting the cables. Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle's electrical system. 1. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 2. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level. 197 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies WARNING Never connect the negative end of the cable to the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. Always use the negative prong as a grounding point. Make sure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, the moving parts of both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts. Jump Starting 1. Start the booster vehicle and press the accelerator pedal moderately. 2. Start the disabled vehicle. Check the instrument cluster for the Ready to Drive light as the gasoline engine may not start, but the electric motor may be running. 3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run both vehicles for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. E148861 1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) prong (A) of the discharged battery. 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the assisting battery. 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) prong (B) of your vehicle. Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the intake manifold or electrical components. These items should not be considered grounding points. Removing the Jumper Cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. 198 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies COLLISION, DAMAGE OR FIRE EVENT Guidance for Ford Motor Company Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicles Equipped With High Voltage Batteries (Vehicle Owner/Operator/General Public) Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicle Considerations In the event of damage or fire involving an electric vehicle (EV) or hybrid-electric vehicle (HEV): • • • E148862 1. Remove the jumper cable from the negative prong. 2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle's battery. 3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle's battery. 4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) prong of the disabled vehicle's battery. • Vehicle Information and General Safety Practices • • After disconnecting the jumper cables, let the disabled vehicle sit in Ready to Drive mode for several minutes to charge the 12V battery. The disabled vehicle can charge the 12V battery even if the gasoline engine may be off. The 12V battery will receive power from the high-voltage battery instead. • 199 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Always assume the high-voltage battery and associated components are energized and fully charged. Exposed electrical components, wires and high-voltage batteries present potential high-voltage shock hazards. Venting/off-gassing high-voltage battery vapors are potentially toxic and flammable. Physical damage to the vehicle or high-voltage battery may result in immediate or delayed release of toxic, flammable gases and fire. Know the make and model of your vehicle. Review the owner’s manual and become familiar with your vehicle’s safety information and recommended safety practices. Do not attempt to repair damaged electric and hybrid-electric vehicles yourself. Contact an authorized Ford Dealer or vehicle manufacturer representative for service. Roadside Emergencies Crashes • A crash or impact significant enough to require an emergency response for conventional vehicles would also require the same response for an electric or hybrid-electric vehicle. • • If possible • • • Move your car to a safe, nearby location and remain on the scene. Roll down the windows before shutting your vehicle off. Place your vehicle in Park, set the parking brake, turn off the vehicle, activate the hazard lights, and move your key(s) at least 16 feet (5 meters) away from the vehicle. Post-Incident • • Always • • • • • Call 911 if assistance is needed and advise that an electric or hybrid-electric vehicle is involved. Do not touch exposed electrical components or the engine compartment, as a shock hazard may exist. Avoid contact with leaking fluids and gases, and remain out of the way of oncoming traffic until emergency responders arrive. When emergency responders arrive, tell them that the vehicle involved is an electric vehicle or hybrid vehicle. • Fires • As with any vehicle, call 911 immediately if you see sparks, smoke or flames coming from the vehicle. • • Exit the vehicle immediately. Advise 911 that an electric or hybrid-electric vehicle is involved. 200 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing As with any vehicle fire, do not inhale smoke, vapors or gas from the vehicle, as they may be hazardous. Remain a safe distance from the vehicle and try to stay clear of the smoke. Stay out of the roadway and stay out of the way of any oncoming traffic while awaiting the arrival of emergency responders. Do not store a severely damaged vehicle with a lithium-ion battery inside a structure or within 50 feet (15 meters) of any structure or vehicle. Make sure that passenger and cargo compartments remain ventilated (i.e. open window, door or trunk). For vehicles in the United States, notify Ford Motor Company 1-800-392-3673 (then follow the prompts on the voice response menu), an authorized Ford dealer or service center as soon as possible as there may be other steps to secure and discharge the high-voltage battery. For vehicles in Canada, notify Ford Motor Company 1-800-565-3673 (then follow the prompts on the voice response menu), an authorized Ford dealer or service center as soon as possible as there may be other steps to secure and discharge the high-voltage battery. Call 911 if you observe leaking fluids, sparks, smoke or flames, or hear gurgling or bubbling from the high-voltage battery. Roadside Emergencies POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the direction indicators and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners. The horn and indicators will turn off when: • You press the hazard control button. • You press the panic button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped). • Your vehicle runs out of power. 201 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Website www.owner.ford.com Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. These are some of the items that can be found online: • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State or Zip Code. • Owner Manuals. • Maintenance Schedules. • Recalls. • Ford Extended Service Plans. • Ford Genuine Accessories. • Service specials and promotions. Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer. In Canada: A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford. Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8 Away From Home Telephone If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer. 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) Website www.ford.ca In the United States: Twitter Mailing address @FordServiceCA (English Canada) @FordServiceQC (Quebec) Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, MI 48126 Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: Telephone 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 1. Additional information and resources are available online: 202 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or servicing authorized dealer. Customer Assistance 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. 3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. In order to help us serve you better, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center: • Vehicle Identification Number. • Your telephone number (home and business). • The name of the authorized dealer and city where located. • The vehicle’s current odometer reading. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000 miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first: In some states within the United States, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state's warranty laws, and Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt. Additionally, in some states within the United States, a consumer has the option of submitting a warranty dispute to the BBB Auto Line before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time). In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126 203 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter. BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below, please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines. THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program. You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or writing to: The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing. BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600 Arlington, Virginia 22201 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673. Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation. 204 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer Relationship Center. The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact: CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit www.camvap.ca. FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 Fax: (313) 390-0804 Email: [email protected] 205 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by emailing [email protected]. For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673). If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact: If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require additional assistance or clarification, please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed. FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673) FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: [email protected] www.ford.com.pr Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673. ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S LITERATURE If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact: To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: HELM, INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, Michigan 48170 Attention: Customer Service FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Ford: 80004443673 Lincoln: 80004441067 If calling from the UAE: 80004441066 If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 8008443673 If calling from Kuwait: 22280384 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website: www.helminc.com (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or money order.) FAX: +971 4 3327266 Email: [email protected] www.me.ford.com 206 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) E142557 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada and Ford of Canada. 207 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance Transport Canada Contact Information Website www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigationsindex-76.htm (English) Website www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetesindex-76.htm (French) Phone 1–800–333–0510 Ford of Canada Contact Information Website www.ford.ca Phone 1–800–565-3673 208 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART WARNINGS To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. Pre-Fuse Box Your vehicle has a pre-fuse box attached to the power distribution box. There is a second pre-fuse box attached to the 12-volt battery terminal in the rear of your vehicle. They contain high-current fuses. If you need to replace one of these fuses, see an authorized dealer. The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has high-current fuses that protect your vehicle's main electrical systems from overloads. Power Distribution Box If you disconnect and reconnect the battery, you will need to reset some features. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 228). WARNINGS Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover to remove it. E162196 209 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F1 50A Midi Cooling fan module. F2 50A Midi Electric water pump. F3 50A Midi Body control module supply 1. F4 50A Midi Body control module supply 2. F5 — Not used. F6 — Not used. F7 40A** Anti-lock brake system pump. F8 30A** Anti-lock brake system valve. F9 40A** Vacuum pump. F10 40A** Heater blower motor. F11 30A** Engine management. F12 — F13 25A** Not used. Powertrain control module relay. F14 20A** Rear wiper. F15 30A** Body control module KL30 supply. F16 20A** Body control module 15 feed. F17 20A** Transmission oil pump (C-MAX Energi). F18 20A** Front wiper motor. F19 5A* Anti-lock brake system and electronic stability program module. F20 15A* Horn. F21 5A* Stop light switch. F22 5A* Vacuum pump monitoring. F23 5A* Engine control module 15. Powertrain control module 15. Transmission oil pump 15. F24 5A* Relay coils. Light switch module. 210 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F25 10A* Motor electronic cooling pump. F26 5A* Electronic power assist steering module 15. F27 5A* Mass air flow sensor. F28 15A* Powertrain control module. F29 10A* Electronic air conditioning compressor. Positive temperature coefficient heater. F30 10A* Engine control module. Powertrain control module. F31 5A* Charge port light ring (C-MAX Energi). F32 20A* Vehicle power 2. F33 15A* Vehicle power 4. F34 10A* Injectors. F35 10A* Vehicle power 3. F36 20A* Vehicle power 1. R1 Micro relay Vacuum pump. R2 Micro relay Horn. R3 Micro relay Hybrid powertrain control. R4 Micro relay Front wiper. R5 Micro relay Vacuum pump. R6 Micro relay Front and rear wiper high-low. R7 — R8 Power relay Not used. R9 — Not used. R10 — Not used. R11 — Not used. R12 Power relay Ignition feed. Cooling fan. 211 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components R13 Mini relay Heater blower. R14 Mini relay Engine control relay. *Mini fuses **Cartridge fuses Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side below the glove box. You may need to remove a trim panel to access it. E129926 212 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F56 20A F57 — Not used. F58 5A Not used (spare). Fuel pump supply. F59 5A Passive anti-theft system. F60 10A Interior light. Driver door switch pack. Glove box illumination. Overhead console switch bank. F61 20A Cigar lighter. Second row power point. F62 5A Autowiper module. Autodimming rear view mirror. F63 10A F64 — Not used (spare). F65 10A Liftgate release. F66 20A Driver door unlock supply. F67 7.5A Cell phone passport (C-MAX Energi). Multi-function display. GPS module. Sync. F68 15A Not used (spare). F69 5A Instrument cluster. Not used. F70 20A Central lock and unlock supply. F71 7.5A Climate control module. F72 7.5A Steering wheel module. F73 7.5A Data link connector. OBD II supply. F74 15A Headlamp supply. F75 15A Fog lamp supply. F76 10A Reversing lamp supply. 213 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F77 20A F78 5A Ignition switch, Start button. F79 15A Radio. Hazard light switch. F80 20A Not used (spare). F81 5A F82 20A Washer pump ground. F83 20A Central locking ground. F84 20A Drive door unlock ground. F85 7.5A Electronic 15 feed. F86 10A Restraints control module. Passenger air bag deactivation indicator. F87 15A Not used (spare). F88 25A Not used (spare). F89 — Washer pump. Power sun shade. Remote receiver antenna. Not used. Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is located in the luggage compartment behind the left side wheel well. Remove the fuse panel cover to gain access to the fuses. 214 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses E129927 Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F1 5A Hands-free liftgate entry module. F2 10A Keyless vehicle module. F3 5A Keyless vehicle door handles. F4 25A Door control unit front left. F5 25A Door control unit front right. F6 25A Door control unit rear left. F7 25A Door control unit rear right. F8 — F9 25A Driver seat motor. F10 25A Heated rear window. F11 5A Ignition relay. F12 15A Battery electronics control module. F13 — F14 10A F15 — Not used. F16 — Not used. F17 10A Battery electronics control module. F18 15A Battery electronics control module — fan. Not used. Not used. Charger (C-MAX Energi). 215 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating F19 15A F20 — F21 15A Protected components Charger fan (C-MAX Energi). Not used. Smart datalink connector. F22 10A F23 — Active noise cancellation. F24 30A DC/AC power converter. F25 25A Power liftgate. F26 40A AC/DC charger (C-MAX Energi). F27 20A Luggage compartment outlet. F28 — Not used. F29 — Not used. F30 5A Parking aid module. F31 5A Rear view camera. F32 5A DC/AC power converter. F33 — Not used. Not used. F34 20A Driver seat heater. F35 20A Passenger seat heater. F36 — F37 20A F38 — Not used. F39 — Not used. F40 — Not used. F41 — Not used. F42 — Not used. Not used. Power sun shade. F43 — Not used. F44 — Not used. F45 5A Humidity sensor. 216 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F46 10A Fuel system. R1 Power relay Rear 15 relay. R2 Mini relay Heated rear window. R3 Micro relay R4 — Fuel door (C-MAX Energi). Not used. R5 — Not used. R6 Micro relay Rear wiper. CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING You must replace a failed fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. If you use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, you may cause severe wire damage and may start a fire. E142430 A fuse may fail if electrical components in the vehicle are not properly working. A broken wire inside the fuse indicates a failed fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. 217 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Working with the Engine On GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle. To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 1. Set the parking brake and shift to park (P). 2. Block the wheels. If your vehicle requires professional service, an authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered. OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD Opening the Hood Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. Precautions • • • • Do not work on a hot engine. Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes) away from the battery and all fuel related parts. E142457 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the left-hand side of the instrument panel. 2. Slightly lift the hood. 3. Release the hood latch by pushing the secondary release lever to your left-hand side. Working with the Engine Off 1. Set the parking brake and shift to park (P). 2. Switch off the engine. 3. Block the wheels. 218 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance 2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop under its own weight for the last 8-12 in (20-30 cm). Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly closed. UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV) WARNING The inverter system controller contains various high-voltage components that can cause serious bodily harm or death. The inverter system controller is not serviceable and should never be touched, probed, or tampered with. E87786 4. Open the hood. Support the hood with the strut. Closing the Hood 1. Remove the hood strut from the catch and secure it correctly after use. Note: Do not attempt to service any of the high-voltage components or wiring. For easier identification, the high-voltage wiring insulation is color coated orange. 219 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance A B C D E F G I H E162485 A Engine coolant reservoir cap. See Engine Coolant Check (page 223). B Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 222). C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 222). D Engine air filter cover. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 238). E Inverter system controller. F Brake fluid reservoir cap. See Brake Fluid Check (page 227). G Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 209). H Inverter system controller coolant reservoir cap. I Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap. See Washer Fluid Check (page 227). 220 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Note: Do not attempt to service any of the high-voltage components or wiring. For easier identification, the high-voltage wiring insulation is color coated orange. UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV) WARNING The inverter system controller contains various high-voltage components that can cause serious bodily harm or death. The inverter system controller is not serviceable and should never be touched, probed, or tampered with. E190353 A Engine coolant reservoir cap. See Engine Coolant Check (page 223). B Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 222). C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 222). D Engine air filter cover. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 238). 221 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance E Inverter system controller. F Brake fluid reservoir cap. See Brake Fluid Check (page 227). G Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 209). H Inverter system controller coolant reservoir cap. I Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap. See Washer Fluid Check (page 227). Adding Engine Oil ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK A Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. B E169062 A MIN B MAX E142732 Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers. ENGINE OIL CHECK Check the level before starting the engine and make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. 1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. 2. Switch the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. 3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. 1. Remove the filler cap. 2. Add engine oil that meets the Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 276). 3. Wipe off any spilled oil. 4. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil immediately. 222 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Low Engine Use (If Equipped) Engine Coolant and Inverter System Controller Coolant The low engine use mode is equipped on Energi models only. The low engine use mode keeps the engine oil quality in good condition when you drive your vehicle with limited engine use. If your vehicle is in low engine use mode when you start the vehicle, a message appears in the information display. When your vehicle is in low engine use mode, your vehicle runs the engine as necessary. Your vehicle has two separate cooling systems. One is for cooling the engine and one is for cooling the inverter system controller that is specific to the hybrid operating system. The two systems operate similarly, with the inverter system controller cooling system generally operating at a lower temperature and pressure. Selecting EV Now mode when your vehicle is in the low engine use mode suspends the low engine use mode for as long as you continue driving your vehicle. The low engine use mode resumes the next time you start your vehicle. Checking the Engine Coolant When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the engine coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 348). Changing the engine oil and resetting the oil life monitoring system suspends the low engine use mode. Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the engine coolant reservoir. ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. WARNINGS Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter. The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentrations. To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark. 223 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Checking the Inverter System Controller Coolant Note: During normal vehicle operation, the coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the coolant has degraded nor does it require the coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the coolant to be replaced. When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the inverter system controller coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 348). Note: It is very important to use coolant meeting the Ford specification in order to avoid plugging the small coolant passageways. Use of concentrated coolant and water may cause coolant passageway plugging and void the warranty. See Capacities and Specifications (page 276). Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the inverter system controller coolant reservoir. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant immediately. See Adding Inverter System Controller Coolant in this chapter. • The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentrations. • Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. Adding Coolant Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants, or additives as they can cause damage to the cooling or heating systems. This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty. 224 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Do not mix different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of coolants may harm your cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may harm the engine, inverter system controller, and cooling system components and may void the warranty. In case of emergency, a large amount of water without engine coolant may be added to the engine cooling system in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the engine cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with engine coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating, or freezing. DO NOT use this method for the inverter system controller cooling system. The inverter system controller cooling system operates close to ambient temperature, and is susceptible to freezing in any subfreezing environment in the absence of coolant. Maintenance • • Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant. Whenever you add coolant, check the coolant level in the inverter system controller coolant reservoir the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough coolant to bring the inverter system controller coolant level to the proper level. Recycled Engine Coolant Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available. Adding Engine Coolant 1. Unscrew the engine coolant reservoir cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap. 2. Use a funnel to add engine coolant to the engine coolant reservoir. Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the engine coolant reservoir. Use engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 276). 3. Close the engine coolant reservoir cap. Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Severe Climates If you drive in extremely cold climates: • It may be necessary to have an authorized Ford dealer increase the coolant concentration above 50%. • A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point protection. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. Whenever you add coolant, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough engine coolant to bring the engine coolant level to the proper level. Adding Inverter System Controller Coolant If you drive in extremely hot climates: • It may be necessary to have an authorized Ford dealer decrease the coolant concentration to 40%. • A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat protection. Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the freeze and corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. 1. Open the inverter system controller coolant reservoir cap. 2. Use a funnel to add coolant to the inverter system controller coolant reservoir. Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the inverter system controller coolant reservoir. Use coolant meeting the Ford specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 276). 3. Close the inverter system controller coolant reservoir cap. 225 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use coolant meeting the Ford specification for optimum cooling system and engine protection. When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated WARNINGS Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only. Operate your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have limited power, will not be able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist, and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury. What You Should Know About FailSafe Cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred. The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and terrain. How Fail-Safe Cooling Works If the engine begins to overheat, the engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area and: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate. Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The service engine soon indicator will illuminate. You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage, therefore: If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However: • The engine power will be limited. • The air conditioning system will be disabled. 1. 2. Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to increase. 3. 4. Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. 5. 226 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. Check the coolant level and replenish if low. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer. Maintenance AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK WASHER FLUID CHECK If required, have an authorized dealer check and change the transmission fluid at the correct service interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 348). If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident. WARNING The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick. Your transmission does not consume fluid. An authorized dealer should check the fluid: • If the transmission is not working properly. • If you notice signs of fluid leakage. Note: The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same reservoir. Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 276). Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. BRAKE FLUID CHECK Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range, the performance of the system could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer immediately. FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed. POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering (EPS) system. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. 227 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance When a low voltage battery replacement is necessary, see an authorized dealer to replace the low voltage battery with a Ford recommended replacement low voltage battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle. CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY WARNINGS Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. To ensure proper operation of the battery management system (BMS), do not allow a technician to connect any electrical device ground connection directly to the low voltage battery negative post. A connection at the low voltage battery negative post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation. When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. Note: If a person adds electrical or electronic accessories or components to the vehicle, the accessories or components may adversely affect the low voltage battery performance and durability and may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle. Your vehicle has a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service. Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically-controlled by a computer, some engine control settings are maintained by power from the low voltage battery. Some engine computer settings, like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy, optimize the driveability and performance of the engine. Some other computer settings, like the clock and radio station Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. Note: See an authorized dealer for low voltage battery access, testing, or replacement. 228 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance presets, are also maintained in memory by power from the low voltage battery. When a technician disconnects and connects the low voltage battery, these settings are erased. Complete the following procedure in order to restore the settings: CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES 1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 2. Shift into park (P). 3. Switch off all accessories. 4. Fully press the brake pedal and start the vehicle. 5. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. While the engine is warming up, complete the following: Reset the clock. See Audio System (page 283). Reset the power windows bounce-back feature. See Windows and Mirrors (page 80). Reset the radio station presets. See Audio System (page 283). 6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. If the engine turns off, press the accelerator pedal to start the engine. 7. While the engine is running, press the brake pedal and shift into neutral (N). 8. Allow the engine to run for at least one minute by pressing on the accelerator pedal. 9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km) to completely relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the engine computer eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim strategy. E142463 Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness. Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES Replace the wiper blades at least annually for optimum performance. You can improve poor wiper quality by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield. Note: The windshield wiper blades are different in length. If you install wiper blades of the wrong length, the wiper blades can clash damaging the wiper system. Service Position Set the windshield wipers in the service position to change the wiper blades. Note: You can use the service position to provide easier access to the wiper blades for freeing them from snow and ice. Note: Make sure the windshield is free from snow and ice before you switch the ignition on. Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries. 1. Switch the ignition on. 2. Switch the ignition off. 229 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Note: Make sure the windshield is clean before using new wiper blades. 1 1 A E129986 3. Press and hold the wiper lever in position A within three seconds. E129990 2 1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the wiper blade locking buttons together. 2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade. 3. Remove the wiper blade. 4. Install in the reverse order. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. Changing the Rear Window Wiper Blade Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when lifting the wiper arm. E162532 4. Release the wiper lever when the windshield wipers reach the service position. Note: The wipers remain in the service position when you switch the ignition on. Press and release the wiper lever to return them to the park position. Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not spring back against the glass when the wiper blade is not attached. 1. Changing the Windshield Wiper Blades Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when lifting the wiper arm. Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not spring back against the glass when the wiper blade is not attached. 230 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lift the wiper arm. Maintenance 3 E142592 E130060 2 2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade. 3. Disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm. 4. Remove the wiper blade. 5. Install in the reverse order. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. 8 feet (2.4 meters) B Center height of lamp to ground C 25 feet (7.6 meters) D Horizontal reference line 1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface, approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away. Note: To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other. ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS 2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height. 3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood. Vertical Aim Adjustment The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer. 231 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A Maintenance REMOVING A HEADLAMP 2 2 E142465 4. On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the right hand portion of the beam pattern. If the top edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line, the headlamp will need to be adjusted. E142468 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Remove the screws that secure the lamp assembly. 3. Pull the headlamp toward the front of your vehicle to disengage it from its locating points and then lift the headlamp up. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. CHANGING A BULB Replacing Headlamp Bulbs WARNING E142467 Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb by only its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2 screwdriver, turn the adjuster either clockwise or counterclockwise in order to aim the headlamp. The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line. 6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps. Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used. Horizontal Aim Adjustment Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle and is non-adjustable. 232 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Locating the headlamp bulbs: E162551 E162549 A Direction indicator lamp. B Low beam headlamp. C High beam headlamp. 1. 2. 3. 4. Replacing the High Beam Headlamp Bulb: Remove the headlamp assembly. Remove service cap. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove bulb from the headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise, then pull it straight out. Install the new bulbs in reverse order. Replacing Side Marker Bulbs: E162550 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the headlamp assembly. Remove service cap. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove bulb from the headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise, then pull it straight out. E162552 1. 2. 3. 4. Replacing the Low Beam Headlamp Bulb: Install the new bulb in reverse order. 233 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Remove the headlamp assembly. Remove service cap. Remove the bulb holder. Remove bulb from the headlamp assembly. Maintenance Replacing Fog, Park and Direction Indicator Bulbs 5 E162553 Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp bulb from the bulb holder. 1. Remove the fog lamp cover. 2. Remove the 2 screws. 3. Remove the lamp. 4 E162554 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 6. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Replacing Tail, Brake and Direction Indicator Bulbs E162555 234 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Replacing Reverse Lamp and Tail Lamp Bulbs 1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position. 2. Open the liftgate. 3. Remove the trim panel cover. E162558 1. Make sure the lighting control is in the off position. 2. Open the liftgate. 3. Remove the trim panel cover. E162556 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Remove the wing nut. 6. Gently pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle. E162559 4. Remove the wing nut. 5. Gently pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle. E162557 7. Remove the bulb holder. 8. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, then turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove the bulb. (A) Taillamp and brake lamp. (B) Direction indicator lamp. Install the new bulb in reverse order. 235 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Replacing the Center High Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs E162560 6. Disconnect the electrical connector. 7. Remove the bulb holder. 8. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn the bulb counterclockwise, and remove the bulb. (A) Reverse lamp. (B) Tail lamp. 9. Install the new bulb in reverse order. E162562 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Detach the clips above the inboard side of the rear window. Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulb 2 3 1 E162563 3. Insert a suitable tool into the holes. 4. Carefully pull the lamp towards the front of the vehicle in order to release the spring clips. E72789 1. Carefully release the spring clip. 2. Remove the lamp. 3. Remove the bulb. Reverse steps to reinstall bulb. 236 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance 6. Remove the bulb holder. 7. Remove the bulb. BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. E162564 5. Gently pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle. Function Trade number Headlamps high beam (Halogen) 9005LL Headlamp low beam (Halogen) H11LL Sidemarker - front 168 Park lamp - front 194 Turn lamp - front W21W Fog lamps H10 (9145) Tail/brake lamp 3157K Turn lamp - rear T20 Backup lamp 921 License plate lamp W5W * High-mount brake lamp W5W * Interior lamps LED * To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer. To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer 237 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Note: When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element listed. See Capacities and Specifications (page 276). CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. Note: Failure to re-install the air cleaner assembly properly by fully seating on the mounting studs in five places and securing with the two bolts may result in air cleaner assembly dislodgement from engine and damage to the air cleaner assembly and other engine components. Therefore we recommend that the air filter be serviced at a Ford dealer. Change the air filter element at the correct interval. Air Cleaner Assembly Components A E162533 B C E 238 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing D Maintenance A Air cleaner assembly. B Air cleaner cover. C Air cleaner outlet tube. D Positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) tube. E Air cleaner intake tube. 4. Remove the bolts from each side of the air cleaner assembly (A) as shown with arrows. Removing the Engine Air Filter Element E162536 E162534 5. Lift the air cleaner assembly (A) from the mounting studs, then rotate and pull it toward the front of the vehicle. 1. Loosen the hose clamps for air cleaner outlet tube (C). Disconnect the tube from the air cleaner assembly (A). 2. Release the tabs and disconnect the PCV tube (D) from the air cleaner outlet tube (C) and remove the tube. 3. Disconnect the air cleaner intake tube (E) from the air cleaner assembly (A). E162537 6. Remove the 5 bolts from the air cleaner cover (B). 7. Remove the air cleaner cover (B) from the air cleaner assembly (A). E162535 239 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Installing the Engine Air Filter Element Note: Clean the inside of the air cleaner assembly before installing a new air filter element. E162540 4. Install and tighten the bolts to each side of the air cleaner assembly (A) as shown with arrows. 5. Attach the air cleaner intake tube (E) to the air cleaner assembly (A). E162538 1. Install the new air filter element into the engine air cleaner assembly. 2. Install the air cleaner cover (B) and tighten the 5 bolts. E162541 6. Connect the PCV tube (D) to the air cleaner outlet tube (C). 7. Connect the air cleaner intake tube (E) to the air cleaner assembly (A). E162539 3. Position the air cleaner assembly (A) onto the engine and make sure the assembly is aligned with the studs. 240 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Vehicle Care GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality: Materials Name Specification Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC-42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC-15 Motorcraft® Detail Wash ESR-M14P4-A ZC-3-A Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.) ZC-20 (U.S.) Engine Shampoo Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC-56 Multi-Purpose Cleaner Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with WSS-M14P19-A Bitterant (U.S.) ZC-32-B2 (U.S.) Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner ZC-54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.) ZC-14 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A ZC-23 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC-37-A • Never use strong household detergents or soap, for example dish washing or CLEANING THE EXTERIOR laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or • Never wash your vehicle when it is hot lukewarm water and a neutral pH to the touch, or during strong or direct shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft sunlight. Detail Wash. • Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel to eliminate water spotting. 241 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Vehicle Care • • • Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird droppings, insect deposits and road tar. These may cause damage to your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Remove any exterior accessories, for example antennas, before entering a car wash. • • • Do not use water pressure higher than 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa). Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C). Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle pattern. Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's surface. Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage painted surfaces. If these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as possible. Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle at an angle to the vehicle's surface may damage graphics and cause the edges to peel away from the vehicle's surface. Exterior Chrome Parts Underbody • Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free of debris or foreign material. • • Apply a high quality-cleaning product to bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. We recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Do not apply the cleaning product to hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning product on chrome surfaces longer than the time recommended. Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage. WAXING Regular waxing is necessary to protect your car's paint from the elements. We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface once or twice a year. When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before applying wax. Note: Never use abrasive materials, for example steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface. • Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers. • Exterior Plastic Parts • For routine cleaning we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped) Hand washing your vehicle is preferred however, pressure washing may be used under the following conditions: 242 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to apply and remove the wax. Apply a small amount of wax in a back-and-forth motion, not in circles. Vehicle Care • • • Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim. The wax will discolor or stain the parts over time. • Roof racks. • Bumpers. • Grained door handles. • Side moldings. • Mirror housings. • Windshield cowl area. Do not apply wax to glass areas. After waxing, your car's paint should feel smooth, and be free of streaks and smudges. • • CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES Car wash chemicals and environmental fallout can result in windshield and wiper blade contamination. Dirty windshield and wipers will result in poor windshield wiper operation. Keep the windshield and wiper blades clean to maintain windshield wiper performance. CLEANING THE ENGINE To clean the windshield and wiper blades: • Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior of the windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner on the instrument panel or door panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces immediately. • For windshields contaminated with tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the entire windshield using steel wool (no greater than 0000 grade) in a circular motion and rinse with water. • Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or windshield washer concentrate. Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. • Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components. • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo. • Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. 243 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the area in and around these locations. Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. Vehicle Care CLEANING THE INTERIOR CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS WARNINGS Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system. On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision. Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page 245). For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner. • • • Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas. • If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner. If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set. Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. • • • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection. Do not use any household cleaning products or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens. Wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces. Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Your warranty may not cover these damages. If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces: 244 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Vehicle Care 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft cloth as quickly as possible. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the soiled area. Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion for 60 seconds on the soiled area. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. You should: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Clean and treat spills and stains as soon as possible. Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather: • Oil and petroleum or silicone-based leather conditioners. • Household cleaners. • Alcohol solutions. • Solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber, vinyl and plastics. REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color code is printed on a sticker on the front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your color code to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color. CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If Equipped) Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout. Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. Always read the instructions before using cleaning products. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS (If Equipped) For cleaning and removing stains such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to warm or hot wheel rims and covers. Note: Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims and covers. Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. 245 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Vehicle Care Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty cleaners in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over a period time. General Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents. • • • Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs. Body • Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain their condition we recommend that you: • • • • • • Clean the wheels weekly using Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply using manufacturer's instructions. Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water when you have completed the cleaning process. To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. • • • • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the underside of front fenders. Periodically wash your vehicle if you store it in exposed locations. Touch-up exposed or primed metal to prevent rust. Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when you wash your vehicle. Lubricate all hood, door and luggage compartment hinges and latches with a light grade oil. Cover interior trim to prevent fading. Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents. Engine VEHICLE STORAGE • If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days or more, read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. • We engineer and test all motor vehicles and their components for reliable, regular driving. Under various conditions, long-term storage may lead to degraded engine performance or failure unless you use specific precautions to preserve engine components. 246 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. Protect from sunlight, if possible. If you store vehicles outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. Change the engine oil and filter prior to storage because used engine oil contains contaminates which may cause engine damage. Start the engine every 15 days for a minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle with the climate controls set to defrost until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. Vehicle Care • • With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running. We recommend that you change the engine oil before you use your vehicle again. We recommend the following options for your plug-in vehicle: • Leave your vehicle plugged in. The 12V battery maintains power if left plugged in. However, this periodically uses electricity from the household outlet. • Connect a battery charger to your 12V battery and leave it on a continuous, slow charge. • Disconnect the 12V battery. If your 12V battery is located in the luggage compartment, do not fully shut the luggage compartment after disconnecting the 12V battery. Only leave the luggage compartment open if your vehicle is stored in a locked location. Fuel System • Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. Cooling System • • Protect against freezing temperatures. When removing your vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirm that there are no cooling system leaks and that fluid is at the recommended level. Brakes • 12V Battery • • Make sure the brakes and parking brake release fully. Tires Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean. If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery, we recommend that you disconnect the battery cables to maintain battery charge for quick starting. • Maintain recommended air pressure. Miscellaneous • Note: It is necessary to reset memory features if you disconnect the battery cables. • Make sure you cover all linkages, cables, levers and pins under your vehicle with grease to prevent rust. Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion. Removing Vehicle From Storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following: • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on window surfaces. • Check windshield wipers for any deterioration. 247 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Vehicle Care • • • • • • Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage such as mice or squirrel nests. Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage. Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. Check brake pedal operation. Drive your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to remove rust build-up. Check fluid levels (including coolant and gas) to make sure there are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels. If you remove the 12-volt battery, clean the cable ends and inspect. Contact an authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues. 248 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires TIRE SEALANT AND INFLATOR KIT Note: The temporary mobility kit contains enough sealant compound in the canister for one tire repair only. See an authorized Ford dealer for replacement sealant canisters. The kit is located under the front-row passenger seat. Loosen the Velcro strap to access the kit. The kit consists of an air compressor to reinflate the tire and a canister of sealing compound that will effectively seal most punctures caused by nails or similar objects. This kit provides a temporary tire repair, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 120 mi (200 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to reach a tire service location. E175977 249 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A Air compressor (inside). B Selector switch. C On and off button. D Air pressure gauge. E Sealant bottle and canister. F Dual purpose hose: air and repair. G Tire valve connector. H Accessory power plug. I Casing and housing. J Bike/raft/sports ball adapters. Wheels and Tires General Information • WARNING • Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death. • Note: Do not use the kit if you have severely damaged a tire. Only seal punctures located within the tire tread with the kit. Do not attempt to repair punctures larger than ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or damage to the tire's sidewall. The tire may not completely seal. • • Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire performance. For this reason: Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph (80 km/h). • • Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi (200 km). Drive only to the closest authorized Ford dealer or tire repair shop to have your tire inspected. • • • • Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure in the affected tire; if the tire is losing pressure, have the vehicle towed. Read the information in the Tips for Use of the Kit section to make sure safe operation of the kit and your vehicle. • Tips for Use of the Kit • To ensure safe operation of the kit: • • • Read all instructions and cautions fully. Before operating the kit, make sure your vehicle is safely off the road and away from moving traffic. Switch on the hazard lights. Always set the parking brake to make sure the vehicle does not move unexpectedly. • 250 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Do not remove any foreign objects, such as nails or screws, from the tire. When using the kit, leave the engine running (only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a well-ventilated area) so the compressor does not drain the vehicle's battery. Do not allow the compressor to operate continuously for more than 15 minutes. This will help prevent the compressor from overheating. Never leave the kit unattended during operation. Sealant compound contains latex. Those with latex sensitivities should use appropriate precautions to avoid an allergic reaction. Keep the kit away from children. Only use the kit when the ambient temperature is between -22°F (-30°C) and 158°F (70°C). Only use the sealing compound before the use-by date. The use-by date is on a label on the sealant canister, which you can see through the rectangular viewing window on the bottom of the compressor. Check the use-by date regularly and replace the canister after four years of non-use. Do not store the kit unsecured inside the passenger compartment of the vehicle as it may cause injury during a sudden stop or crash. Always store the kit in its original location. After sealant use, an authorized Ford dealer must replace the tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel. Operating the kit could cause an electrical disturbance in radio, CD and DVD player operation. Wheels and Tires Sealant compound contains latex. Use appropriate precautions to avoid any allergic reactions. * When inflation only is required for a tire or other objects, the selector must be in the Air E175978 position. Do not remove any foreign object that has pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside assistance. What to Do When a Tire Is Punctured 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve. 2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black tube) from the back of the compressor housing. 3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve by turning the connector clockwise. Tighten the connection securely. Repair a tire puncture within the tire's tread area in two stages with the kit. • • In the first stage, inflate the tire with a sealing compound and air. After you inflate the tire, you will need to drive the vehicle a short distance (about 4 miles [6 kilometers]) to distribute the sealant in the tire. In the second stage, check the tire pressure and adjust, if necessary, to the vehicle's specified tire inflation pressure. First Stage: Inflating the Tire with Sealing Compound and Air WARNINGS Do not stand directly over the kit while inflating the tire. If you notice any unusual bulges or deformations in the tire's sidewall during inflation, stop and call roadside assistance. If the tire does not inflate to the recommended tire pressure within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside assistance. Do not run the engine during kit operation unless the vehicle is outdoors or in a well-ventilated area. Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level and secure area, away from moving traffic. E175979 Switch the hazard lights on. Apply the parking brake and switch the engine off. Inspect the flat tire for visible damage. 4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt power point in the vehicle. 251 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires gauge reading will indicate the tire inflation pressure after about 30 seconds of operation. You should check the final tire pressure with the compressor turned OFF in order to get an accurate pressure reading. 5. Remove the warning sticker found on the canister and place it on the top of the instrument panel or the center of the dash. 6. Start the vehicle and leave the engine running so the compressor does not drain the vehicle’s battery. E175982 E175981 9. When the tire reaches the recommended tire pressure, switch off the kit, unplug the power cable, and disconnect the hose from the tire valve. Re-install the valve cap on the tire valve and return the kit to the stowage area. 10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to distribute the sealant evenly inside the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). 7. Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealant position. Switch the kit on by pressing the on/off button (B). 8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on the tire label located on the driver door or the door jamb area. The initial air pressure gauge reading may indicate a value higher than the label pressure while you pump the sealing compound into the tire. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. The pressure 252 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires 2. Firmly screw the air compressor hose onto the valve stem by turning clockwise. 3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the air position. 4. If required, switch on the compressor and adjust the tire to the recommended inflation pressure shown on the tire label located on the driver's door or door jamb area. You should check the tire pressure with the compressor turned OFF in order to get an accurate pressure reading. 5. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve cap on the tire and return the kit to the stowage area. 11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and check the tire pressure. See Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure. Note: If you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise while driving, reduce your speed until you can safely pull off to the side of the road to call for roadside assistance. Note: Do not proceed to the second stage of this operation. Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure WARNINGS If you are proceeding from the First stage: Re–inflating the tire with sealing compound and air section and have injected sealant in the tire and the pressure is below 20 psi (1.4 bar), stop and call roadside assistance. If tire pressure is above 20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next step. What to Do After the Tire has Been Sealed After using the kit to seal your tire, replace the sealant canister and clear tube (hose). Obtain and replace the sealing compound and spare parts at an authorized Ford Motor Company dealership or tire dealer. You can dispose empty sealant bottles at home. However, return the liquid residue from the sealing compound to an authorized dealer or tire dealer for disposal, or in accordance with local waste disposal regulations. The power plug may get hot after use and should be handled carefully while unplugging. Check the air pressure of your tires as follows: Note: After you use the sealing compound, the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance is 120 mi (200 km). Inspect the sealed tire immediately. Check the tire pressure any time within the 120 mi (200 km) by performing the steps listed previously in the Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure procedure. E175983 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve. 253 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires Removal of the Sealant Canister from the Kit E175987 4. Rotate the sealant canister up 90 degrees and pull away from casing/housing to remove. E175984 1. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black tube) from the compressor housing. Installation of the Sealant Canister to the Kit 1. With the canister held perpendicular to the housing, insert the canister nozzle into the connector and push until seated. 2. Rotate the canister 90 degrees down into the housing/casing. E175985 2. Unwrap the power cord. E175988 3. Snap the back cover back into place. E175986 3. Remove the back cover. 254 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires TIRE CARE Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading E175989 4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (black tube) around the channel on the bottom of the housing/casing. E142542 Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. The Tire Quality Grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2). E175990 5. Wrap the power cord around the housing and stow the accessory power plug into its storage area. Note: If you experience any difficulties when you remove or install the sealant canister, contact your authorized Ford dealer for assistance. Make sure you check the sealant compound’s use-by date regularly. The use-by date is on a label located on the sealant canister, which you can see through the rectangular viewing window on the bottom of the kit. Replace the sealant canister after four years of non-use. 255 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires U.S. Department of Transportation Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1 ½ times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Temperature A B C WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Traction AA A B C WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. 256 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires *kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. *PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. *Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers). *Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position) or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. * B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door *Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. * Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. *Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. *Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Glossary of Tire Terminology *Tire label: A label showing the original equipment tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. *Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code. *Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire. *Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure. For example: for P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or 36 psi (2.5 bar) depending on tire size and for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load-carrying capability. *Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load-carrying capability. 257 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association. B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. Information on P Type Tires C D B E F G H A I J M L K E142543 P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example.) 258 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. Letter rating Speed rating M 81 mph (130 km/h) N 87 mph (140 km/h) Q 99 mph (159 km/h) R 106 mph (171 km/h) S 112 mph (180 km/h) T 118 mph (190 km/h) U 124 mph (200 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) Speed rating W 168 mph (270 km/h) Y 186 mph (299 km/h) Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR. H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or AT: All Terrain, or AS: All Season. 259 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Letter rating Wheels and Tires J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades: *Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. *Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. *Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturer's maximum permissible pressure, or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure, which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label. 260 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle). D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single, defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load or radial tubeless. Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. B C Information on T Type Tires A T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size. Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. D E142544 B LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires. These differences are described below. A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for service on light trucks. B. Load Range and Load Inflation Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits. 261 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires B A C C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio, which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. D E Location of the Tire Label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Inflating Your Tires Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat. Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required. At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company. E142545 T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires. These differences are described below. A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport-utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. 262 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer's maximum permissible pressure and the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure, which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge. Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns WARNING Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat! Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label 263 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label. To check the pressure in your tire(s): 1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile. Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (for example, driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers], never bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated. Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive. 2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure. 3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure. Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge. 4. Replace the valve cap. 5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare. Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires. For T type mini-spare tires, see the Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly section. Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information section. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label. 6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak. 7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges. 264 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Tire Wear Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail. Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist: E142546 When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters) When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars, the tire is worn out and must be replaced. Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed 265 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended. Age WARNING Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (such as load, speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives. In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently. Tire Replacement Requirements You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used. Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number WARNINGS Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and 266 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires WARNINGS may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again WARNINGS When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire: 1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size. 2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again. 3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the wheel and tire assembly. 4. Use both eye and ear protection. For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting. Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the wheel and tire assembly Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle 267 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a pair. The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels. The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system. If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, the system is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may be damaged. Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. *Observe posted speed limits *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns *Avoid potholes and objects on the road *Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking Highway Hazards No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important. If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected. Safety Practices WARNINGS If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds. Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. 268 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires Tire and Wheel Alignment Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation. Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements. Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life. Front-wheel drive vehicles (front tires on the left side of the diagram) A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically. Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension may require alignment of all four wheels. The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear. Tire Rotation Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation. E142547 Non-directional tires 269 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. E70415 Directional tires Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. Snow chains have not been approved for use on your vehicle. Consult your authorized dealer for information on other Ford Motor Company approved methods of traction control. 270 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. E142549 Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem. The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer. Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to be checked. 271 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed When You Believe Your System is Not Operating Properly When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare, the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle. The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system: To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle. 272 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires Low tire pressure warning light Possible cause Customer action required Solid warning light Tire(s) under-inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section. TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section. TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Flashing warning light It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure When Inflating Your Tires When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires. 273 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure may be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure. The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control. Bolt size Ib-ft (Nm) M12 x 1.5 100 (135) * * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal). 274 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires 1 4 3 5 2 E75442 Tighten lug nuts in the order shown. E145950 A Wheel pilot bore Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles. 275 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Engine 2.0L ATK iVCT Engine Cubic inches 122 Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Firing order 1-3-4-2 Ignition system Coil on plug (COP) Compression ratio 12.3:1 Spark plug gap 0.051 in. ± 0.002 in. (1.3 mm ± 0.05 mm) 276 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS Component 2.0L ATK iVCT engine Air filter element FA-1911 Oil filter FL-910-S Low-Voltage Battery BXT-67R Spark plugs SP-530 Cabin air filter FP70 Windshield wiper blade WW-29 (driver side) WW-25 (passenger side) Rear wiper blade WW-12 We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. 277 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number is located on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. E142477 E142476 Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number. The Vehicle Identification Number contains the following information: 278 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, Restraint Devices and their locations C Make, vehicle line, series, body type D Engine type E Check digit F Model year G Assembly plant H Production sequence number Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION E167469 The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or the edge of the door near the door latch, next to the driver's seating position. E142806 The transmission code is on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description. Description Code Electronic continuously variable transmission (HF35 eCVT) J 279 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Capacities WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel. Item Capacity Engine oil 4.5 qt (4.3 L) Engine coolant 8.2 qt (7.8 L) Engine coolant (Energi vehicles) 8.8 qt (8.3 L) Inverter system controller coolant 1.1 qt (1 L) Brake fluid Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid reservoir Automatic transmission fluid* 4.8 qt (4.5 L) Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel tank 13.5 gal (51.1 L) Fuel tank (Energi vehicles) 14 gal (53 L) A/C Refrigerant 1.63 lb (0.74 kg) A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil 5.2 fl oz (153.8 ml) *Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. Specifications Materials Name Specification Motor oil: Motorcraft SAE 0W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP WSS-M2C947-A Engine coolant (U.S.): Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted WSS-M97B44-D2 280 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification CVC-3DIL-B Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.): Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-10-QLVC WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid CXT-10-LV12 WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Windshield washer fluid (U.S.): WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant CYN-16-R WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil YN-32 — Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5 ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 -- Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A -- 281 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. E142732 An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC). Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. 282 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are: • AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz • FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors Radio Reception Factors Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting. Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods. CD and CD Player Information Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. MP3 and WMA Track and Folder Structure Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and folder structures work as follows: • There are two different modes for MP3 and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA track mode (system default) and MP3 and WMA folder mode. • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 and WMA disc. The player numbers each MP3 and WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. The maximum number of playable MP3 and WMA files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present. Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact an authorized dealer for further information. Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached. Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular motion. 283 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System • • MP3 and WMA folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255. Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD/SYNC WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA discs, it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may be present (files with extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This enables you to use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system. Note: You can operate your audio system for up to one hour after you switch off the ignition. Press the ON/OFF control to operate the system with the ignition turned off. The system automatically turns off after one hour. In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files in the current folder. 284 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System A B C D E O N F M L K G H H J E162867 I A Eject: Press to eject a CD. B Cursor arrows: Press to scroll through the menu choices. C OK: Press to confirm menu selections. D INFO: Press to access more information depending upon the source selected. E TUNE: In radio mode, press to manually search through the radio frequency band. F Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone number. G CLOCK: If not in phone mode, press to display the clock. H Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (for example Radio mode or CD mode). 285 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System I Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In CD mode, press to select the previous or next track. Press and hold to move quickly forward through the current track. J VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. K MENU: Press to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure later in this chapter. L SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently. M PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system. See your SYNC information. N MEDIA: Press to open the media source menu. You can press this multiple times to change to CD or to a SYNC-Media device or scroll through the media sources using the arrow buttons. Press OK to select a source. O RADIO: Press this multiple times to select a radio band. Press and hold to select the autostore function. Press to return to the main screen of the active radio band. Note: The CD slot is directly above the touchscreen. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: PREMIUM AM/FM/CD Note: The touchscreen system controls most of the audio features. See your SYNC information. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 286 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System E143843 A TUNE: In radio mode, press to manually search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, press to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. B VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. C Eject: Press to eject a CD. D Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If a specific category is selected (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous in the selected category. In CD mode, press to select the previous or next track. Press and hold to move quickly forward through the current track. E SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance. F SOURCE: Press to access different audio modes, for example AM, FM and CD. 287 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System Note: The CD slot is directly above the touchscreen. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: SONY AM/FM/CD Note: The touchscreen system controls most of the audio features. See your SYNC information. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E143844 A Power: Press to switch the system on and off. B SOURCE: Press to access different audio modes, for example AM, FM and CD. 288 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System C Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If a specific category is selected (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous in the selected category. In CD mode, press to select the previous or next track. Press and hold to move quickly forward through the current track. D TUNE: In radio mode, press to manually search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, press to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. E Volume: Turn to adjust the volume. F SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance. G Eject: Press to eject a CD. Menu Structure Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options. Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly different. Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Press the left arrow to exit a menu. Press MENU. Press OK to confirm a selection. Radio Manual tune Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the frequency band. Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. AST Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM 2 and FM 2 frequency bands. PTY/Set Category Select to have the system search by certain music categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country). RBDS/RDS Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a category. 289 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System SIRIUS Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. Show ESN Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN). You will need this number when communicating with Sirius to activate, modify or track your account. Channel Guide Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK to open a list of the following options for this channel: Tune Channel, Skip Channel or Lock Channel. Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by pressing Direct and entering the channel number. Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN. Set Category Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions only stop on channels in that category. Alerts Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs, artists or teams. The system alerts you when the selection is playing on another channel. Save up to 20 alerts. Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations. Skip No stations Use to restore any channels you previously skipped. Parental Lock (PIN) Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234. Audio Settings Spd. Comp. Vol. Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7. Sound Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance. Occupancy Mode Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating position. RBDS/RDS Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a category. DSP Choose between the stereo modes. 290 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System CD Settings Scan All Select to scan all disc selections. Scan Folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder. CD Compression Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more consistent listening level. Clock Settings Set Time Select to set the time. Set Date Select to set the calendar date. 24h Mode Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode. Display Settings Dimming Select to change display brightness. Language Select to display the language in English, French or Spanish. Temp. setting Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius. than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit www.hdradio.com. DIGITAL RADIO Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets. HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. 291 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: • Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast. • Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. 292 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. Potential station issues Issues Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio. Increase or decrease in audio volume. Cause Action This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue. Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. * There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. The digital multicast is not No action required. This is available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available. decoded, the audio is available. Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. The previously stored No action required. The multicast preset or direct station is not available in tune is not available in your your current location. current reception area. Text information does not match currently playing audio. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Fill out the station issue form at website listed below. * There is no text information Data service issue by the shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. frequency. Fill out the station issue form at website listed HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. No action required. This is normal behavior. below. * http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences 293 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped) SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474. Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. Satellite Radio Reception Factors Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the ence interference and the audio system may mute. SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes. E142593 294 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. When in satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0. Troubleshooting Message Condition Action Acquiring… Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present. tion key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service. SIRIUS system failure No action required. This message should disappear shortly. Invalid Channel The channel is no longer available. Tune to another channel or choose another preset. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel. Contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel. No Signal The signal is lost from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to your vehicle antenna. The signal is blocked. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Updating… Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up to three minutes. 295 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System Message Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474 None found Check Channel Guide Subscription Updated Condition Your satellite service is no longer available. Action Contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. All the channels in the Use the channel guide to selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip skipped or locked. function on that station. SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your vehicle. No action required. The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks and charge devices (if supported). See your SYNC information. USB PORT (If Equipped) WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. MEDIA HUB (If Equipped) You can locate the media hub inside the center console or on the instrument panel. E211463 See your SYNC information. E205592 296 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ GENERAL INFORMATION E198355 SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows you to: • Make and receive calls. • Access and play music from your portable music player. • Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions * & Information). • • • Use applications, such as Stitcher, via ** SYNC AppLink. Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC. • Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands. Stream music from your connected phone. Support • • * These features are not available in all markets and require activation. ** Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own. 297 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Text message. Use the advanced voice recognition system. Charge your USB device (if your device supports this). SYNC™ Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST. When using SYNC: • Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. • Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's manual for further information. • Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See an authorized dealer. Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST. In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673. In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673. Times are subject to change due to holidays. SYNC Owner Account Why do I need a SYNC owner account? • Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports online. • Required to activate the subscription-based SYNC Services and to personalize your Saved Points and Favorites. • Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC. • Access to customer support for any questions you may have. Privacy Information When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cellular phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. Driving Restrictions For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h). Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. 298 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic, Directions and Information. Helpful Hints • Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands. • After pressing the voice button, wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. • Speak naturally, without long pauses between words. • At any time, you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice button. USING VOICE RECOGNITION Initiating a Voice Session This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you. Initiate a voice session by pressing the voice button on the steering wheel controls. See Using Voice Recognition (page 299). E142599 When prompted you can say any of the following: Voice command If you want the system to carry out the following Bluetooth Audio Stream audio from your phone. Cancel Cancel the requested action. mobile (apps | applications) Access mobile applications. Phone Make calls. USB [1] Access the device connected to your USB port. Vehicle Health (Report) Run a vehicle health report. 299 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice command If you want the system to carry out the following Voice Settings | Voice Preferences Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback. Help Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where (cancel | stop | exit) appears you say; cancel or stop or exit. You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets. For example, where mobile (apps | applications) appears, you must say mobile followed by either apps or applications. You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick. Note: SYNC Services and Vehicle health report are only available in the United States of America. The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time. System Interaction and Feedback The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback. Adjusting the Interaction Level Initiate a voice session by pressing the voice button on the E142599 steering wheel controls. See Using Voice Recognition (page 299). When prompted say the following: Voice command If you want the system to carry out the following Voice Settings | Voice Preferences Followed by either of the following: Interaction Mode Standard Provide more detailed interaction and guidance. Interaction Mode Advanced Provide less audible interaction and more tone prompts. The system defaults to the standard interaction mode. 300 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request. For example, the system may ask "Phone, is that Voice command correct?". If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested and may ask you to confirm settings. If you want the system to carry out the following Confirmation Prompts Off Make a best guess from the command; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. Confirmation Prompts On Clarify your voice command with a short question. For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play Johnny Doe." The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, it may prompt you with as many as four possibilities for clarification. Voice command Media Candidate Lists Off If you want the system to carry out the following Make a best guess from the media candidate list. You may still occasionally be asked questions. Media Candidate Lists On Clarify your voice command for media candidates. Phone Candidate Lists Off Make a best guess from the phone candidate list. You may still occasionally be asked questions. Phone Candidate Lists On Clarify your voice command for phone candidates. 301 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are cell phone-dependent features. To check your cell phone's compatibility, see your cell phone's manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR PHONE Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cell phone's functionality. At a minimum, most cell phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Using privacy mode. • Dialing a number. • Redialing. • Call waiting notification. • Caller ID. Pairing a Cell Phone for the First Time Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 1000 entries per Bluetooth-enabled cell phone. Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Put the transmission in position park (P) (automatic transmission) or neutral with the parking brake applied (manual transmission). Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands-free calls. Press the phone button. When the display indicates there is no cell phone paired, do the following: Message Action and Description NO PHONE Press the OK button. FIND SYNC 1. Press the OK button. 2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your device's manual if necessary. 3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. 302 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones Depending on your cell phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current cell phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook. Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Put the transmission in position park (P) (automatic transmission) or neutral with the parking brake applied (manual transmission). Press the phone button, then scroll to: Message Action PHONE SETNGS Press the OK button. BT DEVICES Press the OK button. ADD DEVICE Press the OK button. When the following message appears in the display. FIND SYNC 1. Press the OK button. 2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your device's manual if necessary. 3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. The system then prompts with questions, such as if you would like to set the current cell phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) or download your phonebook. Voice Commands Phone Voice Commands Phonebook ___ Press the voice icon and say: Phonebook ___ at Home Voice Commands Phonebook ___ at Work Phone Phonebook ___ in Office You can then say any of the following commands. Phonebook ___ on Cell Call History Incoming ___ is a dynamic listing that should be the name of a contact in your phonebook. For example you could say "Call Mom". Call History Missed Call History Outgoing 303 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice Command You can also say any of the following: [Phone] Settings [Message] Notification On Voice Command Call ___ Call ___ at Home [Phone] Settings [Message] Notification Off Call ___ at Work [Phone] Settings [Set] Phone Ringer Call ___ in Office [Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 1 Call ___ on Mobile [Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 2 Call ___ on Other [Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 3 Dial [Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer Off Battery None of these commands are available until your cell phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth. Phone Name Signal ___ is a dynamic listing that should be the name of a contact in your phonebook. For example you could say "Call Mom". Text Message Inbox Send [New] Text Message The following commands are only available during active calls: You do not need to say word contained within brackets for the system to understand your command. Voice Commands Hold Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press MENU to go to the PHONE menu. Join Phonebook Commands Go To Privacy When you ask SYNC to access content, for example the phonebook name or number, the requested information appears in the display to view. Phone Menu Commands To access the phone menu with voice commands, press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice Command [Phone] Menu You can then say any of the following: [Phone] Connections | [Media] Connections | [Bluetooth] Connections 304 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Making a Call Press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description Call ___ This command is not available until your cell phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth. Dial Use to enter a phone number digit by digit. When the system confirms the number say one of the following commands: Dial To confirm the number and initiate the call. delete To erase the last spoken digit. You can also press the left arrow button. clear To erase all spoken digits. You can also press and hold the left arrow button. To end a call, press and hold the red phone button. Receiving Calls Phone Options during an Active Call When receiving a call, you can: • Answer the call by pressing the phone button. • Reject the call by pressing and holding the red phone button. • Ignore the call by doing nothing. During an active call, you have more menu features that become available, for example putting a call on hold or joining calls. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options. Press the MENU button during an active call, then scroll to: Message CALL MENU Action and Description Press the OK button. Select one of the following: PRIVACY Press the OK button to switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cell phone for a more private conversation. CALL HOLD Press the OK button to put an active call on hold. JOIN CALLS Join two separate calls. SYNC supports a maximum of three callers on a multiparty call or conference call. 305 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Message Action and Description 1. Press the phone button. 2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, press MENU. 3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press the OK button. Wait until the following message appears. JOIN CALLS Press the OK button. ENTER TONES Enter tones such as numbers for passwords. Scroll until the desired number appears in the display, then press OK; a tone sounds as confirmation. Repeat as necessary. PHONEBOOK To access your phonebook contacts. 1. Press the OK button to select, and then scroll through your phonebook contacts. 2. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the display. 3. Press the phone button to call the contact. CALL HISTORY To access your call history log. 1. Press the OK button to select, then scroll through your call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed). 2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the display. 3. Press the phone button to call the selection. RETURN Exit the current menu. Accessing Features Through the Phone Menu The phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call history and phonebook and sends text messages as well as access cell phone and system settings. You can also access advanced features, for example 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services. 306 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to: Message Action and Description PHONE REDIAL Press the OK button to redial the last number called. Press the OK button again to confirm. PHONE REDIAL Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls after you 1 connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC. Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the OK button again to confirm. INCOMING OUTGOING MISSED The system attempts to automatically re-download your phonebook and call history each time your cell phone connects to SYNC (if the auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone supports this feature). PHONEBOOK To browse your phonebook select: BROWSE Press OK. Scroll down or up to the desired name and press OK. In addition to the Phonebook entry name, the phone number label (Work, Cell, Home or Other) shows on the display. If there are multiple phone number entries for a particular Phonebook name, you can scroll through the different phone labels at this time. Once you have the desired phone label on the screen press OK. The phone number that is stored under the selected label will be shown on the display. Press OK to dial this number. To search for a contact in your phone book select: Press OK. Scroll down until you see the first letter of your phonebook entry. Press OK. Scroll down until you see the second letter of your desired phonebook entry. Press OK. SEARCH 307 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Message Action and Description Repeat entering letters to narrow your search. When you are satisfied with your entry press the right arrow key on the bezel. SYNC will jump to the phonebook contact name that matches your entry. Press OK. In addition to the Phonebook entry name, the phone number label (Work, Cell, Home or Other) shows on the display. If there are multiple phone number entries for a particular Phonebook name, you can scroll through the different phone labels at this time. Once you have the desired phone label on the screen press OK. The phone number that is stored under the selected label will be shown on the display. Press OK to dial this number. TEXT MESSAGE Press the OK button to send, download, read and delete text 1 messages. PHONE SETNGS View your cell phone's status, set ring tones, select your message notification, change phonebook entries and automatically download 1 your cell phone content among other features. SYNC Services Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request various types of information, for example traffic reports and directions. 911 Assist 3 Automatically place an emergency call to a 911 operator following 4 a crash. Vehicle Health Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle. APPLICATIONS Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your smartphone. 308 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing 3 SYNC™ Message Action and Description SYS SETTINGS Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings and advanced menu listings. EXIT MENU Press the OK button to exit the phone menu. 1 This is a cell phone-dependent feature. 2 This is a cell phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature. 3 This is an optional feature and available in the United States only. 4 This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only. Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. Text Messaging Note: This is a cell phone-dependent feature. Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message. SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road. When a new text message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the information display indicates you have a new message. Note: This is a cell phone-dependent feature. Following the notification you can do any of the following: Receiving a Text Message Do nothing to have the message go into your text message inbox. Note: This is a cell phone-dependent feature. Your cell phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. To have SYNC read you the message using voice commands, press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice Command Read Message | Read Text Message | Text Message Action and Description SYNC will read the most recent text message to you. 309 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ To open the test message, press OK to receive and open the text message. Press OK again and SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the message. You can then also choose whether you’d like to reply or forward the message. Reply or forward the message, press OK and scroll to choose between: Message Action and Description REPLY TO MSG Press the OK button to access and then scroll through the list of pre-defined messages to send. FORWARD MSG Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose enter a number. Note: Sending a text message is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages Text messaging is a cell phone-dependent feature. If your cell phone is compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. Note: You can only have one recipient per text message. Press the phone button, then scroll to: Message TEXT MESSAGE Action and Description Press the OK button. Select one of the following: SEND MSG? Allows you to send a new text message based on a predefined set of 15 messages. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the OK button. Scroll to your desired message. Press the OK button. Scroll through your phonebook, call history entries or enter a new number. 5. Press the OK button to enter the desired contact. 6. Press the OK button again when the system asks if you would like to send the message. The system sends each text message with the following signature: This message was sent from my Ford. 310 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Message Action and Description DOWNLOAD MSG Allows you to download your unread messages to SYNC. To download the messages, press the OK button to select. The display indicates the system is downloading your messages. When downloading is complete, SYNC returns you to the inbox. DELETE ALL Allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC. To delete the messages, press the OK button to select. The display indicates when it is finished deleting all your text messages. SYNC returns you to the text message menu. RETURN Press the OK button to exit the current menu. Accessing Your Phone Settings These are cell phone-dependent features. Your cell phone settings allow you to access and adjust some features. For example ring tones, text message notification, modify your phonebook and set up automatic download. Press the phone button, then scroll to: Message PHONE SETNGS Action and Description Press the OK button. Select one of the following: PHONE STATUS See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and roaming status of your connected cell phone. Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When done, press OK again to return to the phone status menu. SET RINGER Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call. You can choose one of the system ring tones or your cell phone ring tones. Press the OK button and scroll to hear the available options. You can also choose to use to use your phone's ring tone. Press the OK button to select the desired ring tone. If your cell phone supports in-band ringing, your cell phone ring plays when you choose the phone ringer option. MSG NTFY You have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives. 311 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Message Action and Description Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the OK button again to confirm. MSG NTFY ON MSG NTFY OFF MODIFY PHONEBOOK AUTODOWNLOAD Modify the contents of your phone book (such as add, delete, download). Press OK to select and scroll between: ADD CONTACTS Press the OK button to add more contacts from your phonebook. Push the desired contact(s) on your cell phone. See your cell phone's manual on how to push contacts. DELETE PHONEBOOK Press OK to delete the current phone book and call history. When Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone Settings menu. DOWNLOAD PHONEBOOK Press OK to select and press OK again when Confirm Download? appears. Automatically download your phone book each time your phone connects to SYNC. Press OK to select. AUTO ON? When this message appears, press OK to have your phonebook automatically downloaded each time. Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every time your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook, call history and text messages can only be accessed when your specific phone is connected to SYNC. * SPEAK NAMES When enabled, SYNC speaks the contact name that is displayed on the screen during phonebook browsing. RETURN Exit the current menu. * Downloading times are cell phone-dependent and quantity-dependent. When Auto Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletions saved since your last download. Bluetooth Devices System Settings The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices, set a cell phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off. This menu provides access to your Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options. 312 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Press the Phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to: Message Action and Description SYS SETTINGS Press the OK button. BT DEVICES Press the OK button. Select one of the following: ADD DEVICE See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 302). CONNECT BT Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone. Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones. Scroll until the desired device is chosen, then press OK to connect the phone. SET PRIMARY? Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone. Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone. Press OK to confirm. BT ON/OFF Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off. Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When the desired selection is chosen, press OK. Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth features. DEL DEVICE Delete a paired cell phone. Press the OK button and scroll to select the device. Press OK to confirm. DELETE ALL Delete all previously paired phones (and all information originally saved with those phones). Press OK to select. RETURN Exit the current menu. 1 2 3 4 1 This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. 2 You can only connect one device at a time. When another cell phone is connected, the previous one is disconnected. 3 SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a phone is selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*). 4 Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates all Bluetooth features. 313 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Advanced and set prompts, languages, defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system information. The Advanced menu allows you to access To access the advanced menu, press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu, the scroll to: Message Action and Description SYS SETTINGS Press OK. ADVANCED Press OK. Select one of the following: PROMPTS Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or asking you for a specific action. To turn these prompts on or off: 1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to select between On and Off. 2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the display. SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu. LANGUAGES 1. DEFAULTS Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook, call history, text messages or paired devices. Press the OK button to select and then press OK again when the following message appears in the display. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages. Choose between English, Français and Español. Once selected, all of the radio displays and prompts are in the selected language. 2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. If you change the language setting, the display indicates that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu. RESTORE? MASTER RESET Completely erase all information stored on SYNC, for example phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices, and return the system to the factory default settings. Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete. SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu. SYNC REBOOT Press OK to select. 314 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Message Action and Description Press OK to select. You only need to press the OK button once. SYNC will be unresponsive for 2-4 minutes while it is rebooting. Wait 2-4 minutes before attempting to execute a SYNC command CONFIRM REBOOT? INSTALL APP Install applications you have downloaded. Press the OK button and scroll to select. Press the OK button to confirm. SYSTEM INFO Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number. Press the OK button to select. RETURN Exit the current menu. 911 Assist (If Equipped) SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (If Equipped) WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. In order for the following features to work, your cell phone must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone's compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. * • SYNC Services : Provides access to traffic, directions and information such as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and more. • 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency. * • Vehicle Health Report : Provides a diagnostic and maintenance report card of your vehicle. Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. * This is an optional feature and available in the United States only. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. 315 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, either a voice message plays or a display message (or icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle is started after a previously paired phone connects. See Supplementary Restraints System (page 35). Important information about airbag deployment is in this chapter. Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. See Roadside Emergencies (page 195). Important information about the fuel pump shut-off is in this chapter. Switching 911 Assist On or Off Press the phone button to enter the phone menu and scroll to: Message Action and Description 911 Assist Press the OK button to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu. On Press the OK button when the desired option appears in the radio display. Off Off selections include: Message Action and Description Off with reminder: Provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection at vehicle start. Off without reminder: Provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection. • To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly: • SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. • The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. • 316 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. SYNC™ • • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. 911 Assist May Not Work If • • • In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for and try to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the emergency services. Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you turn on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the feature on. Before making the call: • SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. • SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel." Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United States Only) WARNING Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions, regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot replace, normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain systems electronically monitored by your vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system, (such as brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury. If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically. Note: This feature is only available in the United States. 317 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register to use this feature. Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for SYNC to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage intervals. Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your cellular phone. Before running a report, review the Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice. The system allows you to check your vehicle's overall health in the form of a diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable information, for example: • Vehicle diagnostic information • Scheduled maintenance • Open recalls and Field Service Actions • Items noted during vehicle inspections by an authorized dealer that still need servicing. Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles. Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report. You can run a vehicle health report after your vehicle has been running a minimum of 60 seconds. Choose one of the following options. To use voice commands, press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Action and Description Vehicle Health (Report) The system will run a vehicle health report of your vehicle's diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it combines with scheduled maintenance information, open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer. To use the screen, press the phone button, then scroll to: Message Vehicle Health Action and Description Press the OK button. Select one of the following: Auto On? Press the OK button and select on or off. 318 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Message Action and Description Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a * health report at certain mileage intervals. * Report Interval Scroll to select between 5000, 7500 or 10000-mile intervals. Select your desired option and press the OK button. Run Report Press the OK button for SYNC to run a health report of your vehicle's diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it combines with scheduled maintenance information, open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer. Return Exit the current menu. You must first turn this feature on before you can select the desired mileage interval. SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI) (If Equipped, United States Only) Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice When you create a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect more vehicle information. Ford may use your vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information, do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement) for more information. Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level and model year and may require a subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn directions available in select markets. Message and data rates may apply. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change or discontinue this product service at any time without prior notification or incurring any future obligation. Note: SYNC Services requires activation before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply. Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 302). Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services. 319 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features provided are only an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, place you in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions. Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect your vehicle's current location, travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you request, for continuous improvement, the service may collect and record call details and voice communications. For more information, see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect your vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions, do not subscribe or use the service. SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports, weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com. Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands Press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Services Action and Description This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request the desired service, for example traffic or directions. Once you are connected to SYNC Services, you can also say the following: (what are my (options | Receive a list of available services from which to choose. choices) | what can I say | [available] commands) 320 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice command Action and Description Services To return to the Services main menu. help Receive system help. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where (options | choices) appears you say either; options or choices. You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets. For example, where; what are my (options | choices) appears, you must say; what are my, followed by either, options or choices. You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where (what can I say [available] commands) appears, you can say, what can I say commands. Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu Press the phone button, then scroll to: Message Action and Description SYNC Apps Press the OK button. Services 1. Press the OK button. The display indicates the system is connecting. 2. Press the OK button again. SYNC initiates the call to the Services portal. 3. Once you connect to the service, follow the prompts to request the desired service, for example traffic or directions. 321 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions When connected to SYNC Services, press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Action and Description Directions To receive directions to a location. Once you select your destination, the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the phone call automatically ends. You then receive audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destination. Business search To find a business or type of business. Select your destination, the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the phone call automatically ends. You then receive audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destination. You can also say the following: Search near me To find the closest business or type of business to your location, within business search. Operator If you need further assistance in finding a location at any time within a Directions or Business search and need to speak with a live operator. The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections. The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when it has difficulty matching your voice request. Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information on Operator Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/ support. * If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route updated. Say yes when prompted and the system sends a new route to your vehicle. Yes * During an active route. 322 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Disconnecting from SYNC Services To disconnect from SYNC services, say: Voice command Goodbye Action and Description From the SYNC Services main menu, or press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel. SYNC Services quick tips SYNC Services quick tips Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information. You can save address points, for example work or home. You can also save favorite information like sports teams or a news category. You can learn more about personalization by logging onto www.SYNCMyRide.com. Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip and say your voice command. Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your personalized services. You can even access your account outside your vehicle. Just use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic and Directions features do not function properly but information services and the 411 connect and text message features are available. Note: The AppLink feature is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord Touch system. SYNC™ APPLINK™ Note: Depending on your display type, you can access AppLink from the media menu, the phone menu, or by using voice commands. Once an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls. SYNC Mobile Apps Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port in order to start the application. 323 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ To Access Using the Phone Menu For more information, please visit: Press the phone button to access the SYNC phone menu on-screen. You can then scroll to: Website www.SYNCMyRide.com Menu item To Access Using the Media Menu Mobile Apps Press OK to access a list of available applications. Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to select a particular app. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu. Press the AUX button on the center console. Scroll until the app name followed by "Menu", is displayed (such as, sticher Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application's features, such as Thumbs up and Thumbs down. Press the Menu button to the SYNC menu and scroll to: Menu item Action and description SYNC-Media Press the OK button. Mobile Apps Press the OK button and scroll through the list of available applications and select your desired app. Scroll until the app name followed by "Menu", is displayed (such as, Stitcher Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application's features, such as Thumbs up and Thumbs down. For more information, please visit: Website www.SYNCMyRide.com 324 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ To Access Using Voice Commands Press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Mobile Apps Action and description Say the name of the application after the tone. The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, for example, "Playlist Road Trip". You can also say the following: The name of an app (such as Stitcher) followed by "help". To discover the available voice commands. Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, make sure you switch it on before plugging it in. You can access and play music from your digital music player over your vehicle's speaker system using the system's media menu or voice commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories, for example artist and album. To Connect Using Voice Commands Plug the device into the USB port. See USB Port (page 296). Note: The system is capable of indexing up to 6,000 songs. E142599 SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including: iPod®, Zune™, plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also supports the following audio formats MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. Press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command USB [1] Action and Description You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands. See Media voice commands. You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where USB[1]appears, you can say USB or USB one. 325 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ To Connect Using the System Menu USB Port (page 296). Plug the device into the USB port. See Press the AUX button, then the Menu button to enter the Media Menu. You can then scroll to: Message Action and Description SELECT SRC Press the OK button. SYNC USB Press the OK button. Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected device, the following message may appear in the radio display. Indexing… When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the Play menu. You can then select one of the following: PLAY ALL ARTISTS ALBUMS GENRES PLAYLISTS TRACKS EXPLORE USB SIMILARMUSIC RETURN Exit the current menu. What's Playing? When a track is playing, you can ask the system to tell you what is currently playing. 326 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Whats This? | Whats Playing? Action and Description The system reads the metadata tags of the playing track, and if the metadata tags are populated, the system will tell you what track is playing. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is. You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets. For example, where text shows: (what's | what is) playing, you must say; "what's playing" or "what is playing". Voice command Media Voice Commands [Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous Song Press the voice button and when prompted say any of the following: [Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song Voice command 1,2 USB [1] Repeat [On] You can then say any of the following Repeat Off [Phone] Connections | [Media] Connections | [Bluetooth] Connections Shuffle [On] Pause Search Album ___ 1,2 Search Artist ___ 1,2 Search The system searches all Genre ___ the data from your indexed music and, if available, begins to play the chosen type of music. You can only play genres of music which are present in the GENRE metadata tags that you have on your digital media player. 1,2 Shuffle Off Play Play All Play Artist ___ 1,2 Play Album ___ 1,2 Play Genre ___ 1,2 [Play] Next Folder 3 [Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song Play Playlist ___ 1,2 [Play] Previous Folder 3 327 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Bluetooth Audio Command Guide Voice command Search Track ___ | Search Song ___ The system searches for a specific artist/track/album from the music indexed through the USB port. This allows you to make Refine album ___ your previous command more specific. By using this command you can filter though a previous selection, such as an artist to play only specific album. Similar Music Press the voice button and say: 1,2 Voice command Bluetooth Audio 1,2 You can then say any of the following: [Phone] Connections | [Media] Connections | [Bluetooth] Connections Pause Play The system compiles a playlist and then plays similar music to what is currently playing from the USB port using indexed metadata information. [Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song [Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous Song Media Menu Features Autoplay Off Autoplay [on] The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play your music, for example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat, and to add, connect or delete devices. Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed during indexing. Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process to finish before the system plays any of your music. Press the AUX button, then the Menu button to enter the Media Menu. 1 ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group, artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles". 2 This voice command is not available until indexing is complete. 3 This voice command is only available in folder mode. 328 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ You can then scroll to: Message Action and Description Play your music by artist, album, genre, playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply, play all. You can also choose to Explore USB to view the supported digital music files on your playing device. See Play Menu later in this section for more information. PLAY MENU Select one of the following: SELECT SRC SYNC USB Press the OK button to access music plugged into your USB port. You can also plug in devices to charge them (if supported by your device). Once connected, the system indexes any readable media files. SYNC BT Press the OK button. This is a phonedependent feature that allows you to stream music playing on your Bluetoothenabled phone. If supported by your device, you can press seek to play the previous or next track. SYNC LINE IN Press the OK button to select and play music from your portable music player over (If Equipped) MEDIA SETTIN 1 2 your vehicle's speakers. Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Autoplay settings. Once you turn these selections on, they remain on until you turn them off. Press SEEK to play the previous or 3 next track. SHUFFLE Press the OK button to shuffle available media files in the current playlist. To shuffle all media tracks, you must select Play All in the play menu and then select Shuffle. REPEAT Press the OK button to repeat any song. AUTOPLAY Press the OK button to turn autoplay on to listen to music processed during indexing. Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process to finish before the system plays 4 any of your music. 329 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Message Action and Description APPLICATIONS Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your smartphone. SYS SETTINGS Access available Bluetooth Device menu listings as well as Advanced menu listings. EXIT MENU Press OK to exit the media menu. 1 The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs to index. If autoplay is on, you can listen to media processed during indexing. If autoplay is off, you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. SYNC is capable of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum indexing file size. 2 If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line in feature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately. 3 Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately. 4 Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs the system needs to process. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is turned on. Accessing Your Play Menu Press the AUX button, then the Menu button to enter the Media Menu. This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album, genre, playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your USB device. You can then scroll to select: Message PLAY MENU Action and Description Press the OK button. If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. If there are media files, you have the following options: PLAY ALL Press the OK button. The first track title appears in the display. Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device in flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order. 330 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Message ARTISTS Action and Description Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetically. If there are fewer than 255 indexed artists, the system lists them alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically. Press the OK button. You can select to play all artists or any indexed artist. 2. Scroll to choose the desired artist. Press the OK button. 1. ALBUMS Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than 255 indexed albums, the system lists them alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically. 1. Press the OK button. You can enter the album menu and select from playing all albums or from any individual indexed album. 2. Scroll to choose the desired album. Press the OK button. GENRES Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically. 1. Press the OK button. 2. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press the OK button. PLAYLISTS Access your playlists from formats ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP. The system lists your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically. 1. Press the OK button. 2. Scroll to select the desired playlist. Press the OK button. TRACKS Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists your tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically. 1. Press the OK button. 2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press the OK button. 331 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Message EXPLORE USB Action and Description Explore all supported digital media on your media device connected to the USB port. You can only view media content which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved are not visible. 1. Press the OK button. 2. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive. SIMILARMUSIC Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each song * to compile a playlist for you. 1. Press the OK button. 2. The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins playing. This feature does not include tracks with incomplete metadata information. Press the OK button. RETURN Exit the current menu. * With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks are not available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voice recognition, play menu browsing and similar music. The system places Unknown items into any unpopulated metadata tag. Bluetooth Devices System Settings The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to enable, disable, add, connect and delete a Bluetooth device. System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu features. Press the AUX button, then the Menu button to enter the Media Menu. You can then scroll to: Message Action and Description SYS SETTINGS Press the OK button. BT DEVICES Press the OK button. You can then select one of the following: ADD DEVICE Pair more devices to the system. 332 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing * SYNC™ Message Action and Description Press the OK button. When find SYNC appears in the display, press the OK button again. 2. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put your phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears in the display. 3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter the PIN. 1. Connect BT Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone. 1. Press OK to select and view a list of devices. 2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen and press OK to connect the device. BT ON/OFF Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off. ** 1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and off. 2. Make a selection and press the OK button. DEL DEVICE Delete a paired media device. 1. Press the OK button and scroll to select the device. 2. Press the OK button to confirm. DELETE ALL Delete all previously paired devices. 1. Press the OK button. 2. Press the OK button to confirm. RETURN Exit the current menu. * This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. ** Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth features. Press the AUX button, then the Menu button to enter the Media Menu. Advanced The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages, defaults and perform a master reset. 333 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ You can then scroll to: Message Action and Description SYS SETTINGS Press the OK button. ADVANCED Press the OK button. You can then select one of the following: PROMPTS Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints or ask you for a specific action. 1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and off. 2. Make a selection and press the OK button. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu. LANGUAGES Choose from the available languages. The displays and prompts are in the selected language. 1. Press the OK button and scroll through the available languages. 2. Press the OK button when the desired language appears in the display. 3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu. DEFAULTS Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices. 1. Press the OK button. 2. Press the OK button. When restore defaults appears in the display, press the OK button again to confirm. MASTER RESET Completely erase all information stored on SYNC. All phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired devices will be deleted and the system will return to the factory default settings. INSTALL APP Download available software applications through the USB port. RETURN Exit the current menu. 334 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Use the website at any time to check your phone's compatibility, register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for more information. SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see the tables below. Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The audio control settings There is excessive background noise during a phone on your phone may be affecting SYNC performcall. ance. Review your phone's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the other person but they cannot hear me. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. SYNC is not able to download my phonebook. This is a phone-dependent feature. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature. Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website. The system says Phonebook This may be a limitation on Downloaded but the your phone's capability. phonebook in SYNC is empty or missing contacts. Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature. If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, try moving them to the device memory. Remove any pictures or special ring tones associated with the missing contact. 335 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Depending upon your phone, you may have to grant SYNC permission to access your phonebook contacts. Make sure to confirm when prompted by your phone during the phonebook download. I am having trouble connecting my phone to SYNC. This is a phone-dependent feature. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try deleting your device from SYNC, deleting SYNC from your device and trying again. Check the security and auto accept and prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone. Update your device's firmware. Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting. Text messaging is not working on SYNC. This is a phone-dependent feature. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. 336 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ USB and media issues Issue I am having trouble connecting my device. Possible cause(s) This may be a possible device malfunction. SYNC does not recognize This is a device limitation. my device when I turn on the car. Possible solution(s) Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable. Make sure you insert the USB cable correctly into the device and the USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an autoinstall program or active security settings. Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures. Bluetooth audio does not stream. This is a phone-dependent Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC feature. The device is not connected. website to confirm your phone supports the Bluetooth audio streaming function. Make sure you correctly connect the device to SYNC, and that you have pressed play on your device. SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, song title, album or genre information. The file may be corrupted. The song may have copyright protection, which does not allow it to play. 337 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Make sure that all song details are populated. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class. SYNC™ Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) I received a text that I did not activate Vehicle Health Report. You did not activate your account on the website. You may have the wrong VIN (vehicle identification number) listed. This is a free feature, but you must first register online to use it. Make sure that your VIN is correctly listed in your account. I am unable to retrieve the report on the website, or I receive a system error. The preferred dealer information did not load correctly. When you register your account, you must choose a preferred dealer. If it already lists a dealer, try selecting another dealer and logging out. Log back in, change it back to your preferred dealer, and retrieve the report. I am unable to submit a report. This could be due to your phone's compatibility. Bad signal strength. You did not register your phone correctly on the website. Update your cellular number in your account on the website. Make sure you have full signal strength and that your Bluetooth volume level has been turned up. Make sure the currently connected phone is registered on your SYNCMyRide account. Try deleting your phone and performing a clean pairing. I heard a commercial when I tried to use Traffic, Directions and Information. You did not activate this phone for this service. Your phone has ID blocker active. This is a free feature, but you must first register online to use it. Turn off ID blocker on your phone as the system recognizes you by your phone number. Make sure the currently connected phone is the same one that is registered on your SYNCMyRide account. 338 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong voice commands. what I am saying. You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time. Review the phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections. After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong the name of a song or artist. voice commands. You may be saying the name differently than the way you saved it. The system may not be reading the name the same way you are saying it. Review the media voice commands at the beginning of the media section. Say the song or artist exactly as listed. If you say "Play Artist Prince", the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New Power Generation. Make sure you are saying the complete title, such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If the song titles are in all CAPS, you have to spell them. LOLA requires you to say "L-O-L-A". Do not use special characters in the title. The system does not recognize them. SYNC does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when I want to make a call. You may be using the wrong Review the Phone voice voice commands. commands at the beginning You may be saying the of the phone section. name differently than the way you saved it. 339 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The system may not be reading the name the same way you are saying it. Contacts in your phonebook may be very short and similar, or they may contain special characters. Your phonebook contacts may be in CAPS. Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly as they are listed. For example, if you save a contact as Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe Wilson". Using the SYNC phone menu, open the phonebook and scroll to the name SYNC is having trouble understanding. SYNC will read the name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation SYNC is expecting. The system works better if you list full names, such as "Joe Wilson" rather than "Joe". Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as the system does not recognize them. If a contact is in CAPS, you have to spell it. JAKE requires you to say "Call JA-K-E". AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) AppLink Mobile ApplicaAn AppLink capable phone tions: When I select "Find is not connected to SYNC. New Apps," SYNC does not find any applications. 340 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Possible solution(s) Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. Additionally, ensure your phone is paired and connected to SYNC™ AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) SYNC in order to find AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to SYNC's USB port with an Apple USB cable. My phone is connected, but AppLink-enabled apps are Ensure you have downI still cannot find any apps. not installed and running on loaded and installed the latest version of the app your mobile device. from your phone's app store. Ensure the app is running on your phone. Some apps require you to register or login on the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone. My phone is connected, my Sometime apps do not app(s) are running, but I still properly close and re-open their connection to SYNC, cannot find any apps. over ignition cycles, for example. 341 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit' option, select that then restart the app. If the app does not have that option, you can also manually "Force Close" the app by going to the phone's settings menu, selecting 'Apps.' then finding the particular app and choosing 'Force stop.' Don't forget to restart the app afterwards, then select "Find New Apps" on SYNC. SYNC™ AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tab the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tab the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC's Mobile App's Menu. My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps. There is a bluetooth bug on some order versions of the Android OS that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you have not turned off bluetooth. 342 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Reset the Bluetooth on your phone by turning it off and then turning Bluetooth back on. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC should be able to automatically re-connect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button. SYNC™ AppLink issues Issue My iPhone phone is connected, my app is running, I restarted the app but I still cannot find it on SYNC. Possible cause(s) Unplug the USB cable from The USB connection to SYNC may need to be reset. the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable back in to the phone. After a few seconds, the app should appear in SYNC's Mobile Apps Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application and restart it. I have an Android phone. I The bluetooth volume on found and started my media the phone may be low. app on SYNC, but there is no sound or the sound is very low. I can only see some of the AppLink apps running on my phone listed in SYNC's Mobile Apps Menu. Possible solution(s) Some Android devices have a limited number of bluetooth ports apps can use to connect. If you have more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of availble Bluetooth ports, you will not see all of your apps listed in SYNC's mobile apps menu. 343 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device. Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC to find. If the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone. Accessories Lifestyle For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your authorized dealer or visit the online store web site: • • • • Web Address (United States) www.Accessories.Ford.com Peace of mind • Web Address (Canada) www.Accessories.Ford.ca • • • • • • • Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories. Ford Motor Company warrants your vehicle's accessory through the warranty that provides the greatest benefit: • 24 months, unlimited mileage. • The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. Exterior style • • • • Custom graphics*. Hood deflector*. Side window deflectors. Splash guards. Interior style • • • • Accent lighting. Cargo area protector. Door sill plates. Floor mats. 344 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Ash cup or smoker's packages. Cargo net*. Roof racks and carriers*. Soft cargo organizers. Bumper-mounted parking assist system*. Car covers. Charge cord storage bag*. Keyless entry keypad. Rear bumper protector. Remote start. Vehicle security systems. Wheel locks. Accessories • Footnote *Ford Licensed Accessory. The accessory manufacturer designs, develops and therefore warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and does not design or test these accessories to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the manufacturer's limited warranty details, and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Accessories product limited warranty from the accessory manufacturer. • For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: • When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information. • The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters, for example, two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations and should be installed only by an authorized dealer. 345 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if their manufacturer did not design them specifically for automotive use. If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect battery performance and durability. In addition, you may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. Extended Service Plan (ESP) PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. That means you get: • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or Lincoln dealership • Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using genuine parts EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S. Only) More than 32 million Ford owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford Extended Service Plan. It is the extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. Rental Car Reimbursement Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself Extended Rental Benefits One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the price of your Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs. If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including bumper to bumper warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions. 1st day Rental Benefit You take advantage of replacement transportation if your vehicle is at your authorized dealer for same day covered repairs. Roadside Assistance Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including: There are four core Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for details. • • • 1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 1,000 covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what’s not covered. 2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items. 3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. 4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components. • Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Extended Service Plan coverage expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you sell your vehicle, prospective buyers may have a higher degree of confidence that vehicle was properly maintained with Ford ESP, thereby improving resale value. Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S., Canada and Mexico. It is the extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company. 346 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts Out of fuel and lock-out assistance. Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car. Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and emergency transportation. Extended Service Plan (ESP) Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly Maintaining Your Vehicle! EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA ONLY) Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine inspections, preventive care and replacement of select items that require periodic attention for normal wear: You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits such as: • • • • • • • • • • • Windshield wiper blades. Spark plugs. The clutch disc. Brake pads and linings. Shock absorbers. Struts. Engine Belts. Engine coolant hoses, clamps and o-rings. Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment. • • There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan, you receive added peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada, the United States and Mexico, provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company dealers. Interest Free Finance Options Available Take advantage of our interest free installment payment plan. Just a 10% down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit checks, no hassles! To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at 800-367-3377. Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada, the United States and Mexico are not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage. This information is subject to change. For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you. Ford ESP P.O. Box 321067 Detroit, MI 48232 347 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Rental reimbursement. Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items. Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires. Roadside Assistance benefits. Scheduled Maintenance Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor limited warranty. Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle. If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part, it could affect emissions compliance. We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning your vehicle down. Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping. They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from general maintenance to collision repairs. It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner's manual. See Capacities and Specifications (page 276). Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops. Please contact your dealer for details. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, make sure you have scheduled maintenance performed at the designated intervals. Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership? Factory-Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received. C-MAX Full Hybrid Your vehicle is equipped with an information display, which indicates the proper oil change interval. This interval may be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers). 348 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information display, it is time for an oil change. Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 miles (800 kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing. Make sure you reset the oil monitoring system after each oil change. All Vehicles If your information display resets prematurely, becomes inoperative or the vehicle battery becomes discharged or disconnected, the oil monitoring system resets to 100% oil life. You should change your engine oil one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) from the previous oil change. Never exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change intervals. Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information. C-MAX Energi Plug-in Hybrid We strongly recommend the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized re-manufactured replacement parts engineered for your vehicle. Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex, performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a message in the information display at the proper oil change interval. This interval may be up to two years or 20000 miles (32000 kilometers). Additives and Chemicals This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop Manual list the recommended additives and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not recommend using chemicals or additives not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information. When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information display, it is time for an oil change. Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 miles (800 kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing. Make sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil change. If your information display resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil change. Never exceed two years or 20000 miles (32000 kilometers) between oil change intervals. 349 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Oils, Fluids and Flushing Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and fluids at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford-approved flushing chemical. In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians at your dealership, should inspect discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination immediately. Owner Checks and Services Make sure you perform the following basic maintenance checks and inspections every month or at six-month intervals. Check every month Engine oil level. Function of all interior and exterior lights. Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure. Windshield washer fluid level. Check every six months Battery connections. Clean if necessary. Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary. Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength. Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary. Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary. Parking brake for proper operation. Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function. Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation. Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary. 350 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Multi-point Inspection Check Every 12 Months (C-MAX Energi Plug-in Hybrid Only) In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems. We recommend having the following multi-point inspection performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great. Inspect the engine oil filter for signs of damage such as rust, paint blistering, scratches or dents. If any of these conditions are present, replace the filter. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 352). Multi-point inspection Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation Battery performance Horn operation Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage * * ** Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Tires for wear and proper pressure For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer ** If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed. Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. 351 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance waste at the same time. NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE This means you do not have to remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying a message in the information display. Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™ (If Equipped) Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you should change the engine oil based on how your vehicle is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduces environmental The following table provides examples of vehicle use and its impact on oil change intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use. When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil Miles (kilometers) Vehicle use and example Normal Normal commuting with highway driving No, or moderate, load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling 7500-10000 (12000-16000) Severe Moderate to heavy load or towing Mountainous or off-road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation 5000-7499 (8000-11999) Extreme 3000-4999 (4000-7999) Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation Normal Maintenance Intervals At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display. Change engine oil and filter. 3 Inspect automatic transmission fluid level. Consult dealer for requirements. Inspect brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake. 352 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing 1, 2 Scheduled Maintenance At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display. 1, 2 Inspect engine cooling system and motor/electronics cooling system strength and hoses. Inspect exhaust system and heat shields. Inspect half-shaft boots. Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension and tie-rod ends. Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. 1 Do not exceed two years or 20000 miles (32000 kilometers) between service intervals. 2 Perform multi-point inspection (recommended). 3 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 222). * Other maintenance items Every 20000 miles (32000 Replace cabin air filter. km) Every 30000 miles (48000 Replace engine air filter. km) At 100000 miles (160000 km) Change engine coolant and motor/electronics coolant. Every 100000 miles (160000 km) Replace spark plugs. Every 150000 miles (240000 km) Change automatic transmission fluid. ** * Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval. ** Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers). 353 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the message appearing in the information display prompting you to change your oil. • Example 1: The message comes on at 28751 miles (46270 kilometers). Perform the 30000-mile (48000 kilometer) automatic transmission fluid replacement. • Example 2: The message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30000 miles (48000 kilometers) (for example, the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25000 miles [40000 kilometers]). Perform the engine air filter replacement. SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance as indicated. If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician. Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances As required Change engine oil and filter every 12 months or 10000 miles (16000 km) unless otherwise indicated by the information display. Perform services listed in the Normal * Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Replace cabin air filter. Replace engine air filter. Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs. km) * Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 222). Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads) Inspect frequently, service as required Replace cabin air filter. Every 5000 miles (8000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Replace engine air filter. Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. 354 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads) Every 5000 miles (8000 km) or six months * Change engine oil and filter. Perform multi-point inspection. * Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 222). Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals Exceptions Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil change interval is 3100 miles (5000 kilometers). There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule: California Fuel Filter Replacement If you register your vehicle in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the completion of your vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service. If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change interval is 1800 miles (3000 kilometers). Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter Replacement The life of the engine air filter and cabin air filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter. 355 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 356 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 357 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 358 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 359 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 360 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 361 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 362 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 363 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 364 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 365 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices Description of Other Rights and Limitations END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT • VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) • • You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have acquired a vehicle having several devices, including SYNC ® and various control modules, ("DEVICES") that include software licensed or owned by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. The SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY. • IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). • GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the following license: • You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICES and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers. 366 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, translate, disassemble or attempt to discover any source code or underlying ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Appendices • • • • Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICES and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE. SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICES, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE. Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICES. • 367 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE ("Supplemental Components".) SOFTWARE updates may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE. Appendices • • Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites. The third party sites are not under the control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the DEVICES operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and you agree to assume any risk associated with the use of the DEVICES. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content outside its intended use. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation. UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. 368 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers. General Operation • Voice Command Control: Certain functions within the SYNC® system may be accomplished using voice commands. Using voice commands while driving helps you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel or eyes from the road. • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. • Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident. • Navigation Features: Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully. • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICES product support, such as the vehicle owner guide. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICES. No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE. SYNC® Automotive Important Safety Information Read and follow instructions: • Before using your SYNC® system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following precautions found in the Owner Guide can lead to an accident or other serious injuries. 369 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices • • • Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Risk • You agree to each of the following:(a) Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving an automobile or other vehicle in violation of applicable law or otherwise driving in an unsafe manner presents a significant risk of distracted driving and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE at excessive volume poses a significant risk of hearing damage and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may not be compatible with new or different versions of an operating system, third party software, or third party services, and the SOFTWARE may potentially cause a critical failure of an operating system, third party software, or third party service.(d) Any third party service accessed by or third party software used with the SOFTWARE (i) may charge an additional fee for access, (ii) may not work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) may change streaming formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may contain adult, profane or offensive content; and (v) may contain inaccurate, false or misleading traffic, weather, financial or safety information or other content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider (WSP) and any data or minute calculators that may be included in the software program are for reference only, are not warranted in any way and should not be relied upon in anyway. • When using the SOFTWARE, you agree to be responsible for and assume the entire risk to the items set forth in Section (a) – (e) above. substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. Route Safety: Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes. Emergency Services: Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. 370 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices Disclaimer of Warranty CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction • 371 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing The laws of the State of Michigan govern this EULA and Your use of the SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE may also be subject to other local, state, national, or international laws. Any litigation arising out of or related to this EULA shall be brought and maintained exclusively in a court of the State of Michigan located in Wayne County or in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby consent to submit to the personal jurisdiction of a court in the State of Michigan located in Wayne County and the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan for any dispute arising out of or relating to this EULA. Appendices the right to litigate (or participate in as a party or class member) all disputes in court before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose decision will be final except for a limited right of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction over the parties may enforce the arbitrator’s award. Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver (a) Application. This Section applies to any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’ INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute means any dispute, action, or other controversy between You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including its price) or this EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum will be conducted solely on an individual basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute heard as a class action, as a private attorney general action, or in any other proceeding in which any party acts or proposes to act in a representative capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will be combined with another without the prior written consent of all parties to all affected arbitrations or proceedings. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, which is a written statement of the name, address, and contact information of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute, and the relief requested. You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve any dispute through informal negotiation within 60 days from the date the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may commence arbitration. (f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration will be conducted by the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an individual and use the SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not You are an individual or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes will also apply. To commence arbitration, submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You may request a telephonic or in-person hearing by following the AAA rules. In a dispute involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds good cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. For more information, see adr.org or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence arbitration only in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business. The arbitrator (c) Small claims court. You may also litigate any dispute in small claims court in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business, if the dispute meets all requirements to be heard in the small claims court. You may litigate in small claims court whether or not You negotiated informally first. (d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any dispute by informal negotiation or in small claims court, any other effort to resolve the dispute will be conducted exclusively by binding arbitration. You are giving up 372 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices may award the same damages to You individually as a court could. The arbitrator may award declaratory or injunctive relief only to You individually, and only to the extent required to satisfy Your individual claim. Arbitration fees and incentives. • • • (h) Claims or disputes must be filed within one year. To the extent permitted by law, any claim or dispute under this EULA to which this Section applies must be filed within one year in small claims court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year period begins when the claim or dispute first could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is not filed within one year, it is permanently barred. i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less. FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly reimburse your filing fees and pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S last written settlement offer made before the arbitrator was appointed (“last written offer”), your dispute goes all the way to an arbitrator’s decision (called an “award”), and the arbitrator awards you more than the last written offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you three incentives: (1) pay the greater of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3) reimburse any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator will determine the amounts. ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000. The AAA rules will govern payment of filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any arbitration you commence, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or brought for an improper purpose. In any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses are not counted in determining how much a dispute involves. (i) Severability. If the class action waiver (Section e) is found to be illegal or unenforceable as to all or some parts of a dispute, then that portion of Section e will not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts will be severed and proceed in a court of law, with the remaining parts proceeding in arbitration. If any other provision of that portion Section e is found to be illegal or unenforceable, that provision will be severed with the remainder of Section e remaining in full force and effect. Telenav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy. 1. Safe and Lawful Use You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: 373 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices 3. Software License (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; • (b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag). 3.1 License Limitations • You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above. 2. Account Information You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete. (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers' trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that i. infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, 374 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license (except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties. Appendices ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav. • 4. Disclaimers • To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others • 5. Limitation of Liability • 375 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas. TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY Appendices REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply. 7. Assignment • 6. Arbitration and Governing Law • You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of law provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you agree to submit 8. Miscellaneous 8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof. 8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or 376 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement. Appendices 8.6 conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement. The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words "include" and "including" and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words "without limitation". 8.3 By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav's Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software. 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions • 8.4 TeleNav's or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party's right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself. The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to Telenav’s third party vendor licensors:: 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE North America, LLC The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. 8.5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of Natural Resources Canada. 377 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information. positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. ©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4 Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results. The Data for Mexico includes certain data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía. No Warranty. This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free. Terms and Conditions Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data together with the Telenav Software solely for the internal business and personal purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, create any derivative works of, or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Restrictions. Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR 378 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices Governing Law. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder. DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you. Government End Users. If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with these End-User Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in accordance with such Notice: Export Control. You shall not export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement. NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606 Entire Agreement. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Telenav (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which this Data was provided. © 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved. 379 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data. Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. Gracenote® Copyright CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523. You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of Gracenote. Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA) Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide, including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name. This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device. This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to 380 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy. OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 381 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing 382 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index A Audio Control...................................................67 A/C Audio System................................................283 Seek, Next or Previous.......................................68 See: Climate Control.........................................108 General Information.........................................283 About This Manual...........................................7 ABS Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC.............................................................284 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/FM/CD.................................................286 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/ FM/CD..........................................................288 See: Brakes...........................................................164 ABS driving hints See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes................................................................165 Menu Structure..................................................289 Accessories....................................................344 Autolamps.........................................................75 Exterior style........................................................344 Interior style.........................................................344 Lifestyle.................................................................344 Peace of mind.....................................................344 Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps.........................................................75 Automatic Climate Control......................108 Temperature Control........................................109 Accessories See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.............................................11 Automatic Engine Shutdown...................133 Automatic Transmission.............................161 Active Park Assist..........................................172 Automatic Transmission...................................161 Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................162 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow..................................................................163 Automatic Steering into Parking Space..................................................................173 Deactivating the Park Assist Feature..........174 Troubleshooting the System..........................174 Using Active Park Assist...................................172 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check.............................................................227 Autowipers........................................................70 Auxiliary Power Points................................126 Adjusting the Headlamps..........................231 Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................232 Vertical Aim Adjustment..................................231 110 Volt AC Power Point...................................126 12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................126 Locations...............................................................126 Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................67 Airbag Disposal...............................................43 Air Conditioning B See: Climate Control.........................................108 Air Filter Battery See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............238 See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................228 Alarm Bonnet Lock See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................66 See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........218 Ambient Lighting............................................79 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................66 Booster Seats..................................................22 Types of Booster Seats......................................23 Arming the Alarm................................................66 Disarming the Alarm...........................................66 Brake Fluid Check.........................................227 Brakes...............................................................164 Appendices....................................................366 Audible Warnings and Indicators.............92 General Information..........................................164 Breaking-In......................................................192 Bulb Specification Chart...........................237 Automatic Transmission Warning Chime...................................................................92 Engine On Warning Chime................................92 Headlamps On Warning Chime......................92 Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................92 Keyless Warning Alert ........................................92 Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................92 C Cabin Air Filter..................................................111 California Proposition 65..............................11 383 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Capacities and Specifications...............280 Child Safety Locks..........................................25 Specifications.....................................................280 Left-Hand Side......................................................26 Right-Hand Side...................................................26 Car Wash Cleaning Leather Seats.............................245 Cleaning Products........................................241 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................245 Cleaning the Engine....................................243 Cleaning the Exterior...................................241 See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................241 Center Console..............................................128 Changing a Bulb...........................................232 Replacing Fog, Park and Direction Indicator Bulbs..................................................................234 Replacing Headlamp Bulbs...........................232 Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulb...........236 Replacing Reverse Lamp and Tail Lamp Bulbs..................................................................235 Replacing Tail, Brake and Direction Indicator Bulbs...............................................234 Replacing the Center High Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs.....................................................236 Exterior Chrome Parts......................................242 Exterior Plastic Parts........................................242 Stripes or Graphics............................................242 Underbody............................................................242 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens........................244 Cleaning the Interior...................................244 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades...........................................................243 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................52 Climate Control............................................108 Collision, Damage or Fire Event..............199 Changing a Fuse............................................217 Fuses........................................................................217 Changing the 12V Battery.........................228 Changing the Engine Air Filter................238 Air Cleaner Assembly Components...........238 Installing the Engine Air Filter Element............................................................240 Removing the Engine Air Filter Element............................................................239 Guidance for Ford Motor Company Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicles Equipped With High Voltage Batteries......................199 Coolant Check See: Engine Coolant Check............................223 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................229 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........42 Creating a MyKey............................................52 Changing the Rear Window Wiper Blade.................................................................230 Changing the Windshield Wiper Blades...............................................................230 Service Position..................................................229 Programming/Changing Configurable Settings...............................................................52 Cruise Control.................................................68 Principle of Operation.......................................179 Charging the High Voltage Battery........155 Cruise control Charge Port...........................................................158 Charging.................................................................158 Charging Equipment.........................................155 Disconnecting the Charging Coupler..........160 Locking the Charging Coupler.......................159 Waiting to Charge...............................................159 See: Using Cruise Control................................179 Customer Assistance.................................202 D Data Recording..................................................9 Checking MyKey System Status...............54 Event Data Recording...........................................9 Service Data Recording........................................9 MyKey Distance....................................................54 Number of Admin Keys......................................54 Number of MyKeys..............................................54 Daytime Running Lamps..............................77 Checking the Wiper Blades......................229 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance.................................................33 Child Restraint Positioning.........................24 Child Safety.......................................................15 Digital Radio...................................................291 General Information.............................................15 Direction Indicators........................................78 Type 1 - Conventional (Non-Configurable)........................................77 Type 2 - Configurable..........................................77 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting............................................292 384 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Export Unique Options..................................13 Extended Service Plan (ESP).................346 Driver and Passenger Airbags...................36 Children and Airbags..........................................36 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment........................................................36 EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA ONLY)................................................................347 EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S. Only)..................................................................346 Driver Knee Airbag.........................................40 Driving Aids......................................................181 Driving Hints...................................................192 Driving Through Water................................193 DRL Exterior Mirrors.................................................81 Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................82 Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................82 Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors..........................82 Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................81 Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................82 See: Daytime Running Lamps..........................77 E F Economical Driving......................................192 EcoSelect.........................................................142 Emission Control System..........................150 Fastening the Seatbelts..............................28 Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................30 Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................29 Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........28 On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).....................151 Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing....................................................152 Flat Tire Inflation End User License Agreement.................366 VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) ................................366 See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit.................249 Floor Mats.......................................................194 Fog Lamps - Front Engine Block Heater.....................................132 Using the Engine Block Heater......................133 See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................77 Engine Coolant Check................................223 Ford Credit..........................................................11 Adding Coolant...................................................224 Adding Engine Coolant....................................225 Adding Inverter System Controller Coolant.............................................................225 Checking the Engine Coolant........................223 Checking the Inverter System Controller Coolant.............................................................224 Engine Coolant and Inverter System Controller Coolant........................................223 Recycled Engine Coolant................................225 Severe Climates..................................................225 What You Should Know About Fail-Safe Cooling..............................................................226 (U.S. Only).................................................................11 Front Fog Lamps.............................................77 Front Parking Aid............................................171 Front Passenger Sensing System.............37 Fuel and Refueling.......................................143 Fuel Consumption.......................................150 Calculating Fuel Economy..............................150 Filling the Tank....................................................150 Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................145 Fuel Filter.........................................................227 Fuel Quality....................................................144 Choosing the Right Fuel...................................144 Fuel Freshness Mode........................................144 Engine Immobilizer Fuel Shutoff...................................................196 Fuses................................................................209 Fuse Specification Chart..........................209 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................65 Engine Oil Check..........................................222 Adding Engine Oil...............................................222 Low Engine Use..................................................223 Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel............214 Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.........212 Power Distribution Box...................................209 Pre-Fuse Box.......................................................209 Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................222 Engine Specifications.................................276 Environment......................................................14 Event Data Recording See: Data Recording..............................................9 385 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index G Hill Start Assist..............................................165 Switching the System On and Off...............166 Using Hill Start Assist.......................................166 Garage Door Opener Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate..........................................................109 See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............121 Gauges...............................................................85 Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................110 General Hints.......................................................109 Heating the Interior Quickly.............................110 Recommended Settings for Cooling ..........110 Recommended Settings for Heating...........110 Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather..............................................................110 Left Information Display....................................85 Right Information Display.................................87 General Information on Radio Frequencies...................................................44 Intelligent Access.................................................44 General Maintenance Information.......348 Multi-point Inspection......................................351 Owner Checks and Services.........................350 Protecting Your Investment..........................348 Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................348 Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?.....................................................348 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes............................................................165 Hood Lock See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........218 Hybrid Vehicle Frequently Asked Questions.....................................................140 Hybrid Vehicle Operation...........................135 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada.........................................................205 Getting the Services You Need...............202 Battery:...................................................................136 Braking:...................................................................136 Driving:....................................................................135 Driving to Optimize Fuel Economy..............136 Engine:....................................................................136 EV+ Mode...............................................................137 Starting:..................................................................135 Stopping:................................................................135 Transmission Operation:..................................135 Away From Home..............................................202 Global Opening................................................81 Opening the Windows........................................81 H Handbrake See: Parking Brake.............................................165 Hazard Warning Flashers..........................196 Headlamp Adjusting I See: Adjusting the Headlamps......................231 Ignition Switch...............................................129 In California (U.S. Only)............................203 Information Display Control......................69 Headlamp Exit Delay....................................76 Headlamp Removal See: Removing a Headlamp..........................232 Multimedia Controls...........................................69 Head Restraints..............................................113 Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................114 Information Displays.....................................93 Heated Seats.................................................120 Heated Windows and Mirrors....................111 General Information............................................93 Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................111 Heated Rear Window..........................................111 Heating See: Climate Control.........................................108 High Voltage Battery Cut-Off Switch............................................................160 High Voltage Battery...................................153 General Information..........................................153 386 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Keys and Remote Controls.........................44 Information Messages.................................101 AdvanceTrac®.....................................................102 Alarm.......................................................................102 Battery and Charging System (High Voltage)............................................................102 Doors.......................................................................103 Fuel..........................................................................103 Hill Start Assist....................................................103 Keys and Intelligent Access............................104 Maintenance........................................................105 MyKey.....................................................................105 Park Aid..................................................................106 Park Brake.............................................................106 Power Steering....................................................107 Remote Start........................................................107 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................107 Transmission........................................................107 L Lighting Control...............................................74 Headlamp Flasher................................................75 High Beams.............................................................74 Lighting...............................................................74 General Information............................................74 Load Carrying.................................................182 Load Limit.......................................................183 Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer..................................................................183 Locking and Unlocking.................................56 Activating Intelligent Access ...........................57 Autolock..................................................................59 Battery Saver.........................................................60 Illuminated Entry..................................................59 Illuminated Exit.....................................................59 Mechanical Key.....................................................57 Opening a Rear Door from Inside...................57 Power Door Locks................................................56 Remote Control....................................................56 Smart Unlocks For Integrated Keyhead Transmitter........................................................58 Smart Unlocks For Intelligent Access Keys ................................................................................58 Installing Child Restraints............................16 Child Seats...............................................................16 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................17 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)............................................19 Using Tether Straps..............................................21 Instrument Cluster........................................85 Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................76 Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps......................76 Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps...............76 Interior Lamps.................................................78 Locks...................................................................56 Luggage Covers.............................................182 Front Interior Lamp..............................................78 Front Interior Lamp - With Panorama Roof......................................................................78 Rear Interior Lamp...............................................79 Removing the Shade.........................................182 M Interior Mirror...................................................83 Maintenance..................................................218 Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................83 Introduction.........................................................7 General Information..........................................218 J Manual Liftgate..............................................60 Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................197 Manual Seats..................................................115 Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................197 Jump Starting......................................................198 Preparing Your Vehicle......................................197 Removing the Jumper Cables........................198 Adjusting the Height of the Driver's Seat......................................................................116 Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped)................117 Moving the Seat Backward and Forward..............................................................116 Recline Adjustment............................................116 Closing the Liftgate..............................................61 Opening the Liftgate..........................................60 K Keyless Starting............................................129 Media Hub......................................................296 Message Center Ignition Modes.....................................................130 See: Information Displays.................................93 387 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Power Door Locks Mirrors See: Locking and Unlocking.............................56 See: Heated Windows and Mirrors.................111 See: Windows and Mirrors...............................80 Power Liftgate..................................................61 Mobile Communications Equipment.......12 Motorcraft Parts............................................277 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................54 MyKey™..............................................................51 Hands-Free Feature............................................63 Obstacle Detection.............................................63 Opening and Closing the Liftgate...................61 Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................63 Stopping the Liftgate Movement...................62 Principle of Operation..........................................51 Power Seats.....................................................117 N Power Lumbar......................................................119 Power Steering Fluid Check.....................227 Power Windows.............................................80 Normal Scheduled Maintenance...........352 Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™.........................352 Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................352 Accessory Delay.....................................................81 Bounce-Back.........................................................80 One-Touch Down................................................80 One-Touch Up......................................................80 Window Lock.........................................................80 O Oil Check Protecting the Environment........................14 See: Engine Oil Check.......................................222 R Opening and Closing the Hood...............218 Closing the Hood................................................219 Opening the Hood..............................................218 Rear Parking Aid............................................170 Rear Seat Armrest........................................120 Rear Seats........................................................119 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature.....................................................206 Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........207 Folding the Seatback ........................................119 Unfolding the Seatback....................................119 Overhead Console........................................128 P Rear Under Floor Storage..........................182 Rear View Camera........................................176 Parking Aids....................................................170 Rear View Camera Using the Rear View Camera System.........176 Principle of Operation.......................................170 See: Rear View Camera....................................176 Parking Brake.................................................165 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................65 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........72 Rear Window Washer.........................................73 Rear Window Wiper.............................................72 SecuriLock®...........................................................65 PATS Refueling..........................................................146 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................65 Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System................146 Easy Fuel™ Capless System - Energi Vehicles Only...................................................147 Perchlorate.........................................................11 Personal Safety System™..........................34 Remote Control..............................................44 How Does the Personal Safety System Work?..................................................................34 Car Finder................................................................48 Integrated Keyhead Transmitters .................44 Intelligent Access Key.........................................45 Remote Start (If Equipped).............................48 Replacing the Battery.........................................46 Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................48 Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation...........137 ECO Cruise............................................................139 EV Modes...............................................................137 Fuel Freshness.....................................................139 Low Engine Use...................................................139 Plug-in Power Mode and Hybrid Mode...................................................................137 Remote Start....................................................111 Automatic Settings.............................................112 Post-Crash Alert System...........................201 Removing a Headlamp..............................232 388 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Seatbelts............................................................27 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............245 Replacement Parts Recommendation.........................................11 Principle of Operation.........................................27 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime................................................................31 Collision Repairs.....................................................11 Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs...................................................................11 Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12 Conditions of operation......................................31 Seats...................................................................113 Security..............................................................65 Side Airbags.....................................................39 Sitting in the Correct Position...................113 Snow Chains Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control............................................................50 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)..............................................................207 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)..............................................................207 Roadside Assistance...................................195 See: Using Snow Chains.................................270 Special Notices................................................12 New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12 On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II).......................12 Special Instructions..............................................12 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance........................................................195 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance Program Coverage.................196 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance........................................................196 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance....................................195 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance....................................195 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance..............................................354 Exceptions............................................................355 Speed Control See: Cruise Control.............................................179 Stability Control............................................168 Principle of Operation......................................168 Starter Switch See: Ignition Switch...........................................129 Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................130 Roadside Emergencies...............................195 Running-In Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................132 Important Ventilating Information...............132 Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is Moving................................................................132 Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is Stationary..........................................................131 Vehicles with an Ignition Key.........................130 Vehicles with Keyless Start............................130 See: Breaking-In..................................................192 Running Out of Fuel.....................................145 Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container..........................................................145 Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................145 S Starting and Stopping the Engine..........129 Safety Canopy™............................................40 Safety Precautions.......................................143 Satellite Radio..............................................294 General Information..........................................129 Steering.............................................................181 Electric Power Steering.....................................181 Steering Wheel................................................67 Storage Compartments.............................128 Sun Shades......................................................84 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)................................................................295 Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............294 SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service.................294 Troubleshooting.................................................295 Bounce-Back.........................................................84 Opening and Closing the Sun Shade...........84 Sun Shade Relearning.......................................84 Scheduled Maintenance Record...........356 Scheduled Maintenance..........................348 Seatbelt Height Adjustment.....................30 Seatbelt Reminder..........................................31 Sun Visors.........................................................83 Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................83 Supplementary Restraints System.........35 Belt-Minder™.........................................................31 Principle of Operation.........................................35 Symbols Glossary.............................................7 389 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index SYNC™ Applications and Services.......315 Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................249 911 Assist................................................................315 SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI) (If Equipped, United States Only).....................................................319 Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United States Only).....................................................317 First Stage: Inflating the Tire with Sealing Compound and Air........................................251 General Information.........................................250 Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure............................................................253 Tips for Use of the Kit......................................250 What to Do After the Tire has Been Sealed...............................................................253 What to Do When a Tire Is Punctured........251 SYNC™ AppLink™......................................323 SYNC Mobile Apps............................................323 SYNC™............................................................297 Tires General Information..........................................297 SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................335 See: Wheels and Tires.....................................249 Towing a Trailer.............................................190 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels..........................................................190 T Tailgate Emergency Towing............................................190 Recreational Towing...........................................191 See: Manual Liftgate..........................................60 See: Power Liftgate..............................................61 Towing..............................................................190 Traction Control.............................................167 Technical Specifications See: Capacities and Specifications............276 Principle of Operation.......................................167 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only)......................204 Tire Care..........................................................255 Transmission Code Designation............279 Transmission...................................................161 Transmission Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................257 Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading.............................................................255 Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall...........................................................258 Temperature A B C............................................256 Traction AA A B C..............................................256 Treadwear............................................................256 See: Transmission...............................................161 Transporting the Vehicle...........................190 U Under Hood Overview - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV).............................................219 Under Hood Overview - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)...........................221 Unique Driving Characteristics................135 Universal Garage Door Opener.................121 Tire Inflation When Punctured See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit.................249 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........270 Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System.........................................271 Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System ........................................271 HomeLink Wireless Control System.............121 USB Port.........................................................296 Using Cruise Control....................................179 Switching Cruise Control Off.........................180 Switching Cruise Control On...........................179 Tire Repair Kit Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems..........................................................54 Using Snow Chains.....................................270 Using Stability Control...............................169 See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit.................249 390 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Vehicle Storage............................................246 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player.............................................................325 12V Battery............................................................247 Body........................................................................246 Brakes.....................................................................247 Cooling System...................................................247 Engine....................................................................246 Fuel System..........................................................247 General..................................................................246 Miscellaneous......................................................247 Removing Vehicle From Storage..................247 Tires.........................................................................247 Accessing Your Play Menu.............................330 Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port...........................................................325 Media Menu Features......................................328 Media Voice Commands.................................327 System Settings.................................................332 What's Playing?.................................................326 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............302 Accessing Features Through the Phone Menu.................................................................306 Accessing Your Phone Settings......................311 Making a Call......................................................305 Pairing a Cell Phone for the First Time...................................................................302 Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................303 Phone Options during an Active Call.........305 Phone Voice Commands................................303 Receiving Calls...................................................305 System Settings..................................................312 Text Messaging..................................................309 Ventilation See: Climate Control.........................................108 VIN See: Vehicle Identification Number............278 Voice Control...................................................68 Using Traction Control................................167 Switching the System Off................................167 System Indicator Lights and Messages..........................................................167 Using a Switch.....................................................167 Using the Information Display Controls.............................................................167 Using Voice Recognition...........................299 Initiating a Voice Session................................299 System Interaction and Feedback.............300 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only)........................205 V Vehicle Care....................................................241 General Information..........................................241 Vehicle Certification Label.......................279 Vehicle Identification Number................278 391 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index W Wrecker Towing See: Transporting the Vehicle.......................190 Warning Lamps and Indicators................89 Anti-Lock Braking System................................89 Battery.....................................................................89 Brake System........................................................89 Cruise Control.......................................................89 Direction Indicator...............................................89 Door Ajar.................................................................89 EcoSelect................................................................89 Engine and Motor Coolant Temperature.....................................................89 Engine Oil................................................................90 EV Later...................................................................90 EV Now....................................................................90 Fasten Safety Belt...............................................90 Front Airbag...........................................................90 Front Fog Lamps..................................................90 High Beam..............................................................90 Liftgate Ajar...........................................................90 Low Battery............................................................90 Low Fuel Level......................................................90 Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................90 Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist..............90 Parking Lamps.......................................................91 Powertrain Fault....................................................91 Ready to Drive........................................................91 Service Engine Soon............................................91 Stability Control.....................................................91 Stability Control Off............................................92 Stop Safely.............................................................92 Vehicle Plugged in................................................92 Washer Fluid Check.....................................227 Washers See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................241 See: Wipers and Washers.................................70 Waxing.............................................................242 Wheels and Tires.........................................249 Technical Specifications.................................274 Windows and Mirrors...................................80 Windshield Washers......................................72 Windshield Wipers.........................................70 Intermittent Wipe.................................................70 Speed Dependent Wipers................................70 Wiper Blades See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................229 Wipers and Washers.....................................70 392 C-MAX (CCG) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing